738561
8
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/596
Pagina verder
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas-
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
2
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's information
14
Digital owner's manual in the car
15
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
16
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
18
Volvo Cars support site
19
Reading the owner's manual
19
Recording data
22
Important information on accesso-
ries, extra equipment and diagnostic
socket
23
Volvo ID
23
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
25
IntelliSafe-driver support
28
Sensus - connection and maintenance
29
The owner's manual and the environment
32
Windows, glass and mirrors
32
Overview of the centre display
33
Operating the centre display
36
Navigating in the centre display's views
40
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
45
Change settings for the centre display
45
Function view with buttons for car
functions
47
Using the keyboard in the centre display
49
Writing characters/letters by hand
on the screen
53
SAFETY
Safety
56
Safety during pregnancy
56
Whiplash Protection System
57
Pedestrian Protection System
58
Seatbelt
59
Seatbelt tensioner
59
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt
60
Door and seatbelt reminder
62
Airbags
63
Driver and passenger airbags
64
Activating/deactivating the passen-
ger airbag*
66
Side airbag
68
Inflatable curtain
69
Safety mode
69
Starting/moving the car after safety
mode
70
Child safety
71
Child seats
71
Upper mounting points for child seats
73
Lower mounting points for child seats
74
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
75
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
77
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
78
Table for location of i-Size child seats
81
Integrated booster cushion*
82
Folding up the integrated booster
cushion*
82
Folding down the integrated booster
cushion*
84
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car
86
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car
87
Driver display
90
Driver display settings
94
Indicator symbols in the driver display
95
Warning symbols in the driver display
97
Outside temperature gauge
98
Clock
99
License agreement for the driver display
99
Application menu in the driver display
105
Using the application menu in the
driver display
105
Messages in the driver display and
the centre display
106
Managing messages in the driver
display and the centre display
108
Managing messages saved from the
driver display and centre display
110
Head-up display*
112
Voice recognition
115
Using voice recognition
116
Settings for voice recognition
117
Voice recognition control of the phone
118
Voice recognition control of radio
and media
118
Voice recognition control of climate
control
119
Voice recognition and map navigation
120
Manual front seat
121
Power front seat*
121
Adjusting the power front seat*
122
Using the memory function in the
power front seat*
122
Multi-functional front seat*
123
Adjusting functions in the multi-func-
tional front seat*
124
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
127
Rear seat
128
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
128
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
130
Steering wheel
131
Adjusting the steering wheel
132
Headlamp control
134
Headlamp levelling
135
Position lamps
136
Daytime running lights
137
Dipped beam
137
Activating/deactivating main beam
138
Active bending lights*
141
Adapting the beam pattern from the
headlamps
141
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
142
Rear fog lamp
142
Brake lights
143
Hazard warning flashers
143
Using direction indicators
144
Passenger compartment lighting
145
Home safe light duration
148
Approach light duration
148
Using windscreen wipers
148
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
149
Windscreen and headlamp washers
150
Rear window wiper and washer
151
Power windows
151
Operating power windows
152
Using the sun blind*
153
Adjusting the door mirrors
153
Interior rearview mirror
155
Compass*
156
Calibrating the compass*
157
Panorama roof*
158
Operating the panorama roof*
159
HomeLink
®
*
162
4
Programming HomeLink
®
*
163
Trip computer
165
Show trip data in the driver display
166
Show trip statistics in the centre display
168
Settings view
169
Categories in the settings view
170
Changing system settings in the set-
tings view
172
Resetting settings in the settings view
173
Driver profiles
174
Selecting driver profile
174
Editing a driver profile
175
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
176
Importing/exporting a driver profile
from/to USB
177
Changing settings for apps
178
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
179
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate control
182
Climate control - sensors
183
Perceived temperature
183
Air quality
184
Passenger compartment filter
185
Clean Zone Interior Package*
185
Interior Air Quality System*
185
Climate controls
186
Climate controls in the centre display
187
Climate controls at the rear of the
tunnel console*
188
Auto-regulating the climate
189
Activating/deactivating air conditioning
190
Regulating the temperature
190
Regulating the fan level
193
Activating/deactivating defrost of
windows and door mirrors
194
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
196
Air distribution
197
Changing the air distribution
198
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
199
Table of air distribution options
201
Activating/deactivating heating of
the seats*
203
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the seats*
204
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel*
205
Parking climate*
206
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
207
Timer for preconditioning*
208
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
208
Activating/deactivating the timer for
preconditioning*
210
Starting/switching off climate com-
fort retention*
210
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
212
Heater*
213
Parking heater*
214
Additional heater*
215
5
LOADING AND STORAGE
Passenger compartment interior
218
Tunnel console
219
Electrical sockets
220
Using the cigarette lighter*
224
Emptying ashtrays*
224
Using the glovebox
225
Sun visors
226
Cargo area
226
Loading
227
Load retaining eyelets
228
Bag hooks
228
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
229
Cargo cover*
230
Safety net*
232
Safety grille*
233
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key
236
Remote control key range
238
Red Key - Restricted remote control key*
239
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
240
Locking/unlocking from the outside
241
Indication on locking/unlocking the car
243
Locking/unlocking from the inside
245
Deadlocks*
246
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
247
Using private locking
249
Detachable key blade
250
Locking/unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade
251
Power operated tailgate*
253
Opening/closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
256
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
257
Immobiliser
260
Child safety locks
261
Alarm*
262
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
264
Disarming the alarm* without work-
ing remote control key
264
Type approval for the remote control
key system
265
6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force
272
Roll Stability Control
272
Electronic stability control
273
Sport mode for electronic stability control
274
Symbols and messages for elec-
tronic stability control
275
Speed limiter*
277
Activating and starting the speed limiter
278
Managing speed for the speed limiter
278
Deactivating/reactivating the speed
limiter
279
Switching off the speed limiter
280
Automatic speed limiter*
281
Activating/deactivating the automatic
speed limiter
282
Changing the tolerance for the Auto-
matic speed limiter
283
Cruise control
284
Activating and starting the Cruise control
284
Managing speed for the Cruise control
285
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise
control
286
Deactivating Cruise Control
287
Distance Warning*
288
Activating and setting the time inter-
val for Distance warning*
289
Limitations of Distance Warning*
290
Adaptive cruise control*
290
Activating and starting the adaptive
cruise control*
294
Managing the speed of the adaptive
cruise control*
295
Setting the time interval for the
adaptive cruise control*
296
Deactivating/activating the adaptive
cruise control*
297
Overtaking assistance with the adap-
tive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
298
Change of target and automatic
braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control
299
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
300
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control*
301
Symbols and messages for the
adaptive cruise control*
302
Pilot Assist*
304
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
307
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
309
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
310
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
311
Change of target and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist*
313
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
314
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
316
Radar unit
318
Limitations of the radar unit
319
Type approval for radar units
323
Camera unit
326
Limitations of the camera unit
327
City Safety
330
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
332
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
333
City Safety in cross traffic
335
City Safety when evasive manoeu-
vres are prevented
336
Limitations of City Safety
337
Messages for City Safety
339
Rear Collision Warning
340
Blind Spot Information*
340
Activate/deactivate Blind Spot
Information*
342
Limitations of Blind Spot Information*
343
Cross Traffic Alert*
343
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
344
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
345
Messages for Blind Spot
Information* and Cross Traffic Alert*
347
7
Road Sign Information*
348
Sign display with Road Sign Information
348
Speed camera information*
350
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
351
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
352
Driver Alert Control
352
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
353
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
354
Lane Keeping Aid
354
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
356
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
358
Run-off Mitigation
360
Symbols and messages for Run-off
Mitigation
362
Park Assist*
363
Activating/deactivating Parking
assistance*
365
Limitations of Parking assistance*
365
Messages for Park Assist*
367
Park Assist Camera*
368
Park assist lines and fields for the
Park Assist Camera*
370
Starting the Park Assist Camera*
372
Limitations of the Park Assist Camera*
373
Park Assist Pilot*
374
Parking with Active parking assistance*
376
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
379
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
381
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
384
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
384
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
384
Ignition positions
385
Starting the car
386
Switching off the car
387
Steering lock
388
Using jump starting with another battery
388
Gearbox
389
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
390
Manual gearbox
392
Gear shift indicator*
392
Gear selector inhibitor
394
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
395
Start/Stop
396
Using the Start/Stop function
396
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
398
Drive modes*
400
Drive mode ECO
403
Level control* and shock absorption
405
All-wheel drive
406
Brake functions
406
Foot brake
406
8
Emergency brake lights
408
Brake assistance
408
Auto braking after a collision
409
Parking brake
409
Using the parking brake
410
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
412
Hill start assist
412
Automatic braking when stationary
413
Low speed control
414
Hill descent control
415
Driving in water
416
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
417
Overloading the starter battery
418
Preparations for a long trip
418
Winter driving
419
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
and refuelling
420
Handling of fuel
421
Petrol
422
Diesel
423
Empty tank and diesel engine
424
Diesel particulate filter
424
Economical driving
425
Towing bracket*
426
Extendable/retractable towing brackets*
426
Towing bracket specifications*
428
Driving with a trailer
429
Driving with a trailer under special
conditions
431
Trailer Stability Assist*
432
Towing eye
433
Towing
434
Recovering the car
435
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Audio and media
438
Apps
438
Audio settings
439
Radio
440
Changing and searching radio stations
440
RDS radio
443
Digital radio
444
Linking between different radio
bands FM and DAB
444
Settings for radio
445
Media player
446
Media playback
447
Gracenote
®
449
Searching media
450
CD player*
450
Media via Bluetooth
451
Connecting media via Bluetooth
451
Media via AUX/USB input
451
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
452
video
452
Audio settings for media
452
TV*
453
Using the TV*
453
Apple CarPlay*
454
9
Using Apple CarPlay*
455
Settings for Apple CarPlay*
456
Android Auto*
457
Settings for Android Auto*
458
Technical specifications for media
459
Phone
460
Connect phone
461
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
462
Managing phone calls
463
Managing text messages
465
Managing the phone book
466
Settings for phone
466
Settings for text messages
467
Bluetooth settings
467
Online car*
467
Connecting the car
468
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot
469
No or poor connection
470
Remove Wi-Fi network
471
Wi-Fi technologies and security
471
Settings for car modem*
472
Downloading, updating and uninstal-
ling apps
472
License agreement for audio and media
474
Terms and conditions for services
and Customer Privacy Policy
484
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
486
Tyres' rotation direction
487
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
488
Checking the tyre pressures
488
Tyre monitoring*
489
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre
monitoring system*
491
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre
monitoring*
492
Calibrating tyre monitoring*
493
Emergency puncture repair kit
494
Using the emergency puncture repair kit
495
Inflate tyres with the compressor
from the emergency puncture repair kit
498
When changing wheels
499
Removing a wheel
499
Fitting the wheels
501
Wheel bolts
502
Spare wheel*
502
Winter wheels
503
Tool kit
504
Warning triangle
504
Jack*
505
First aid kit
505
Dimension designation for wheel rim
506
10
Dimension designation for tyre
506
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
510
Car status
510
Book service and repair
510
Remote updates
513
System updates
513
Data transmission between car and
workshop
514
Raise the car
516
Opening and closing the bonnet
518
Engine compartment overview
519
Engine oil
520
Checking and filling with engine oil
521
Topping up coolant
522
Servicing the climate control system
524
Bulb replacement
524
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
526
Replacing the main beam lamp
527
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
528
Replacing the front direction indica-
tor bulb
528
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
529
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
530
Bulb specifications
530
Wiper blades in service position
531
Replacing a wiper blade
532
Filling washer fluid
533
Starter battery
534
Symbols on the batteries
537
Support battery
537
Fuses
539
Replacing a fuse
540
Fuses in engine compartment
541
Fuses under glovebox
544
Fuses in cargo area
548
Cleaning the exterior
551
Polishing and waxing
553
Rustproofing
554
Cleaning the interior
554
Cleaning the centre display
555
Paint damage
556
Repairing paint damage
557
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
560
Dimensions
563
Weights
564
Towing capacity and towball load
565
Engine specifications
567
Engine oil — specifications
568
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
569
Coolant — specifications
570
Transmission fluid — specifications
570
Brake fluid — specifications
570
Fuel tank - volume
571
Air conditioning — specifications
571
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
573
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
575
Load index and speed rating
576
Approved tyre pressures
577
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index 579
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
14
This is how you find owner's
information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen-
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a
supplement to the owner's manual available in
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor-
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's centre display
1
In the centre display, drag down
the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual navi-
gation with exterior and interior
images of the car. The informa-
tion is searchable and is also
divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car. Available in the app are
video tutorials and options for
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi-
gate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual
1
in the glove-
box that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order.
Changing the language in the car's
centre display
Changing the language in the centre display may
mean that some owner's information does not
correspond to national or local laws and regula-
tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult
to understand, it may then be difficult to find your
way back in the structure on the screen.
1
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
INTRODUCTION
}}
15
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
mendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
Related information
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
Digital owner's manual in the car
A digital
2
version of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
To open the digital owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. The
options can be reached from the start page of
the owner's manual. One way is from the top
menu, with a tap on
.
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Leads to the start page of
the Owner's Manual.
Articles grouped by cate-
gory. The same article may
appear in several catego-
ries.
Leads to a Quick Guide
page with links for a selec-
tion of articles that can be
particularly useful to read.
Provides answers to com-
mon questions about the
car.
2
Applies for most markets.
||
INTRODUCTION
16
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Exterior and interior over-
view images of the car. Dif-
ferent parts are designated
with hotspots that lead to
articles about those parts
of the car.
All articles that have been
favourited are compiled
here.
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Leads to short video tutori-
als for different functions in
the car.
Indicates what version of
the Owner's Manual is
available in the car and pro-
vides other useful informa-
tion.
Related information
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16)
Navigating in the digital owner's
manual
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display in the car. The content is
searchable and it is easy to navigate between
different sections.
The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
Open the digital owner's manual
To open the digital owner's manual - drag
down the top view in the centre display and
tap on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. To
access the owner's manual menu – press
in
the upper bar of the owner's manual.
INTRODUCTION
}}
17
Searching using categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcate-
gories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
categories in order to be found
more easily.
1.
Press
and then select Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
Tap on a main category (
).
>
A list of subcategories (
) and articles
(
) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back,
press the back arrow.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with hot-
spots that lead to articles about
those parts of the car.
1.
Press
and then select Exterior/
Interior.
> Exterior/interior images are shown with
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go
back, press the back arrow.
Learn about the car's most common
functions with the Quick Guide
Leads to a page with links for a
selection of articles that can be
particularly useful to read in
order to get to know the most
common functions of the car.
The articles can also be
accessed via categories, but
are collected here for quick access. Tap on an
article in order to read it in its entirety.
Favourites
Located here are the articles
that have been saved as
favourites. Tap on an article in
order to read it in its entirety.
Saving/deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing at the
top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
again in the current article.
Video
Leads to short video tutorials
for different functions in the
car.
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car as well as other
useful information.
||
INTRODUCTION
18
Start page
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Using the search function
1.
Tap on
in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3. Tap on the article/category to access it.
Related information
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile app
from both the App Store and Google Play. The
app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
in the owner's manual and the content is search-
able.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
Related information
Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
19
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site. There you
can navigate through to My Volvo
3
, a personal
web page for you and your car.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as web-
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-
by-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to cus-
tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer.
My Volvo on the Internet
3
From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate
through to My Volvo Web which is a personal
Web page for you and your car.
Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo
Web and get an overview of service, agreements
and warranties, amongst other things. At My
Volvo Web there is also information about acces-
sories and software adapted for your car model.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 23)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
tions and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
ual.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help
will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
3
Applies to certain markets.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
20
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot-
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of impor-
tance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
INTRODUCTION
21
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer-
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual:
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
bered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instruc-
tions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the relative order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
taining closely associated information.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic
and may deviate from the car's appearance
depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
INTRODUCTION
22
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis-
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo-
graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit-
uation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis-
tered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
cle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
tion can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of contin-
uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties with-
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
managed and that its management complies with
relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
tion - contact a Volvo dealer.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
23
Important information on
accessories, extra equipment and
diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of accesso-
ries, extra equipment or software/diagnostic
tools may have a negative effect on the car's
electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associ-
ated software is installed in the car's computer
system. Volvo therefore recommends always
making contact with an authorised Volvo work-
shop before the installation of accessories or
extra equipment that are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket
WARNING
Volvo Cars accepts no responsibility for the
consequences of cases where non-authorised
equipment is connected to the car's data link
connector (On-Board-Diagnostics (OBD-II)).
The diagnostic socket is located under the instrument
panel and on the same side as the steering wheel.
Volvo ID
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
sonalized Volvo services
4
online.
It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, My
Volvo
5
or the Volvo On Call app
6
. Certain func-
tions and services require that the car is regis-
tered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
services available directly from the car.
Examples of services:
My Volvo - A personal web page for you and
your car.
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
to the car.
Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
ferred workshop/dealer in My Volvo to be
able to book service directly from the car.
Creating a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created with My Volvo or
the Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also be
registered to the car to enable use of the various
Volvo ID services.
4
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
5
Available in certain markets.
6
If you have Volvo On Call*.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
24
In My Volvo
5
1. Go to www.volvocars.com and navigate
through to My Volvo.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
With Volvo On Call mobile app
6
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol-
lows:
1.
Download the Volvo ID app from
Download
Centre in the centre display's app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Creating and registering a Volvo ID for
the car
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from
Download Centre.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Advantages of Volvo ID
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
changed automatically for other services (e.g.
My Volvo).
Related information
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
5
Available in certain markets.
6
If you have Volvo On Call*.
INTRODUCTION
}}
25
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val-
ues and influences all operations. The environ-
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy-
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
sumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
26
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ-
ment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment -
here is some advice:
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph)
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to
increased energy consumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and main-
tenance of the car.
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
Use preconditioning* before starting in cold
conditions - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine
reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which decreases consumption and
reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom-
passes a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica-
ble standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compart-
ment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger com-
partment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
edge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer-
ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
27
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 400)
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 32)
Economical driving (p. 425)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 573)
Air quality (p. 184)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
28
IntelliSafe-driver support
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning
car safety. It comprises a number of systems
that contribute to making a car journey safe, to
the prevention of injuries and to the protection of
passengers from other road users.
Support
There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that
help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner.
The driver support functions incorporated in the
car include e.g. the adaptive cruise control
(Adaptive Cruise Control)* that ensures that a
constant distance is held between the car and
the vehicle in front.
Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car
between the lane's edge markings, combined
with maintaining a preset time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by
sensing the area around it.
Other examples of systems that help the driver
are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys-
tems.
Prevention
An example of a function that helps to prevent
accidents is City Safety. The function warns the
driver of risks of collision with another vehicle,
pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver
does not react to the warning and the risk of col-
lision is imminent then City Safety can automati-
cally brake the car.
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a
function that helps to prevent accidents by warn-
ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter-
ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side
line.
Also available is the run-off mitigation function
(Run off mitigation), whose purpose is to reduce
the risk of the car unintentionally leaving the
road, and it actively steers the car back onto the
road.
Protection
To protect the driver and passengers, the car is
equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten-
sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col-
lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains,
as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
which protects against whiplash injuries.
A Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is also
available for mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car in the event of a frontal collision.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 344)
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
City Safety (p. 330)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Roll Stability Control (p. 272)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Safety (p. 56)
Airbags (p. 63)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
Sensus - connection and
maintenance
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use different types of apps and make the car a
Wi-Fi hotspot.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online
connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.
Information when it is needed, where it
is needed
The different displays in the car provide informa-
tion at the right time. The information is shown in
different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
30
G000000
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,
speed information and navigation* information.
Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls
are also shown in the head-up display. The dis-
play is operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.
Driver display
12-inch driver display.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
31
8-inch driver display.
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two steer-
ing wheel keypads.
Centre display
Many of the main functions of the car are con-
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini-
mal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
The climate control system, the entertainment
system and seat position are controlled from
here, for example. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the driver
needing to take his/her hands
off the steering wheel. The sys-
tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to play back a song, call some-
one, increase the temperature or read out a text
message.
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Related information
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Driver display (p. 90)
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Online car* (p. 467)
Audio and media (p. 438)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
32
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi-
nating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
®
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC
®
-certified forests or
other controlled sources.
Related information
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains controls for windows, glass
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas-
senger compartment more soundproof, amongst
other things.
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is
laminated
7
.
Related information
Panorama roof* (p. 158)
Power windows (p. 151)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
Using the sun blind* (p. 153)
Interior rearview mirror (p. 155)
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)
7
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
INTRODUCTION
}}
33
Overview of the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
||
INTRODUCTION
34
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively
8
.
Function view - car functions that are acti-
vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func-
tions are also so-called trigger functions,
which means they open a window with set-
8
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
35
ting options. Examples of such are
Camera
and parking functions.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and
apps for embedded functions, such as
FM
radio
. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work/connection information is shown on the
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication
about on-going background activity are
shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view.
Settings, Owner's
manual
, Profile and the car's saved mes-
sages are accessed from here.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview
to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with
media. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Extra subview - recently used apps/car func-
tions that do not belong in any of the other
subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct interac-
tion to set temperature, seat heating level
and fan level. Tap on the symbol in the cen-
tre of the climate row in order to open the
climate view with more setting options.
Related information
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
Changing settings for apps (p. 178)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
Settings view (p. 169)
Media player (p. 446)
Phone (p. 460)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
36
Operating the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov-
ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways.
An infrared film enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech-
nology makes it possible to use the screen even
with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different proce-
dures for operating the screen:
Procedure Execution Result
Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc-
cession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
37
Procedure Execution Result
Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move
apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Drag apart Zooms in.
Drag together Zooms out.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
38
Turn off the screen and reactivate it
Home button for the centre display.
When the centre display is switched off, the
screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive
whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible,
and apps and other functions connected to the
screen will continue to run.
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
ton below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
mate row, which continues to be shown.
All functions continue to run, such as cli-
mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In
this mode, the screen can be cleaned with
the cloth supplied; see the section
"Cleaning the centre display".
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
screen.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Returning to home view from another
view
1. Briefly press the home button.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
2. Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set to
their default mode.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Moving apps and buttons for car
functions
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app
view and function view respectively can be moved
and organised as desired.
1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.
> The app/button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the
view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in
order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an
app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the
bottom of the view. New rows are then added,
where the app/button can be located.
An app/button can thus be located further down
and is then not visible in the normal mode for the
view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down-
ward in the view.
INTRODUCTION
39
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often.
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it
is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
drag the control to the desired temperature,
tap on
+/ in order to raise/lower the tem-
perature gradually, or
tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.
Related information
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Settings view (p. 169)
Sensus - connection and maintenance
(p. 29)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Change settings for the centre display
(p. 45)
INTRODUCTION
40
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The
screen is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.
An app/car function selected from the app/func-
tion view starts in the respective subview of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the
Media subview.
The extra subview contains the last used app/car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about each
different app.
NOTE
The first time the car is used, some of the
home view's subviews have no content.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
INTRODUCTION
}}
41
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
||
INTRODUCTION
42
Expanding a subview:
Press anywhere on the subview. When a
subview is expanded, the fourth subview in
the home view is temporarily forced away.
The other two are minimised and only certain
information is shown.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
The subview can be closed in three different
ways.
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
Tap on another subview (that subview will
then open in expanded mode instead).
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening/closing a subview in full screen
mode
The extra subview and the subview for
Navigation can be opened out in full screen
mode, with even more information and more set-
ting options.
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews is
shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go back
to the expanded mode, or press
the home button at the bottom
of the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
home view's standard view from full screen mode
- press twice on the home button.
Status bar
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network/connection information is
shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock and
indication that background activity is in progress
are shown on the right.
Top view
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open the top view by
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is available to:
Settings
Owner's manual
Profile
The car's saved messages.
INTRODUCTION
}}
43
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi-
ble and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during starting/
shutdown or when a message is shown on
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown.
Go into the top view from an app
Drag down the top view when an app is running,
e.g. FM radio:
Press
FM Radio Settings - settings that are
associated with FM radio are shown.
Press
FM Radio Manual - an article that is
associated with FM radio is opened.
This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
possible to access app-specific articles or set-
tings, for example.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature, seat heating and fan.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate set-
tings.
Press the symbol to close the climate
view and return to the previous view.
Application view
Application view with the car's apps.
Swipe from right to left
9
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view)
from the home view. Apps that have been down-
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as
FM radio, are found here. Cer-
tain apps show brief information directly in the
9
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
44
app view, such as the number of unread text
messages for
Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as
Media.
Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible
to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by
swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
To move an app:
1. Tap on the app and hold depressed.
> The app becomes slightly transparent and
larger when it is ready to be moved.
2. Drag the app to the desired location.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right
9
across the screen, or by pressing the
home button.
Function view
The function view with buttons for different car func-
tions.
Swipe from left to right
9
across the screen in
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif-
ferent car functions, e.g.
Lane Departure
Warning
, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated/deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Just as in app view, it is possible to move the
function buttons around and arrange them in the
desired order.
Related information
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
Changing settings for apps (p. 178)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
9
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
INTRODUCTION
}}
45
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar.
Symbol Specification
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone net-
work.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
The car then shares the available
connection.
Car modem activated.
Remote diagnostics active.
Process in progress.
Symbol Specification
Preconditioning in progress.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 106)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Change settings for the centre
display
The centre display is started automatically when
the driver's door is opened. The settings can be
changed for the centre display to personalise
sound and themes. The screen can be switched
off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.
Switching off/changing the system
sounds volume in the centre display.
The system sounds volume in the centre display
can be adjusted or switched off:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Under
Screen Touch, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds and Keypad Touch in order to
adjust the volume/switch off screen key-
board touch sounds. Drag the control to the
desired volume.
Changing the appearance of the screen
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Then select theme, e.g.
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
sible to choose between
Normal and Bright.
||
INTRODUCTION
46
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
which the background is light and the text is dark.
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
light.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Related information
Settings view (p. 169)
Sensus - connection and maintenance
(p. 29)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
INTRODUCTION
}}
47
Function view with buttons for car
functions
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
home view by swiping from left to right across
the screen
10
.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for car
functions; see below:
Type of button Property Affects car function
Function buttons Have on/off positions.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the but-
ton. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Most buttons in function view are function
buttons.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a
window for changing a seat's position.
Camera
Headrest fold
Functions for folding seats
Head-up display adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
Park In
Park Out
10
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
INTRODUCTION
48
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti-
vate/deactivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-
tor is extinguished.
When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Categories in the settings view (p. 170)
INTRODUCTION
}}
49
Using the keyboard in the centre
display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
Making entries with the keyboard
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
||
INTRODUCTION
50
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
INTRODUCTION
}}
51
Row of suggested words or characters
11
.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among the
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all lan-
guage selections. If not available, the row will
not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depend-
ing on the context in which the keyboard is
used - either to enter @ (when an email
address is entered) or to create a new row
(for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to
enter one capital letter and then continue
with lower-case letters. Another press makes
all letters capital letters. The next press
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi-
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
entry, all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which in
number mode is shown instead of
, to
return to the letter keyboard, or
to
open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. UK. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language.
Press to open a list of languages and then
tap on the language to be used. To add addi-
tional languages in the keyboard - see the
heading "Changing keyboard language"
below.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character at a time. Hold the button
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
characters by hand instead. Read more
under the heading "Writing characters/
letters by hand on the screen".
Press the confirmation button above the key-
board (not visible in the image) to confirm the
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
fers depending on context.
Changing the keyboard language
To make it possible to switch between different
languages for the keyboard, the languages must
first be added under
Settings.
Adding/deleting languages in settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually adapted without
affecting the system language.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the list.
> It is now possible to switch between the
selected languages directly from the key-
board for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under
Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan-
guage as the car's system language; see the
section "Changing system settings in the set-
tings view".
11
Applies to Asiatic languages.
||
INTRODUCTION
52
Switching between different languages in
the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the keyboard button
(shown in context as number 7
in the illustration above) is used
to switch between different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language:
1. Press and hold the button (see image
above).
> A list opens.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are
given.
Variants of a letter or character
To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. é or
è:
1. Press and hold the letter/character.
> A box with possible variants of the letter/
character opens.
2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari-
ants are selected, the original letter/charac-
ter is entered.
Related information
Settings view (p. 169)
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
Managing text messages (p. 465)
Changing system settings in the settings
view (p. 172)
INTRODUCTION
53
Writing characters/letters by hand
on the screen
Area for writing letters/characters.
Text field where letters/characters are
entered as they are drawn out on the screen.
Suggested letters/characters. The list is
scrollable.
Space.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one letter/character at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete the
next letter/character, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Change text input language.
Writing characters/letters by hand
1. Write a character/letter in the area for hand-
written letters (1).
> A number of suggested characters or let-
ters is shown (3). The most likely choice is
found at the top of the list.
2. Enter the character/letter by waiting a
moment.
> The character/letter at the top of the list
is entered. It is also possible to select a
different character by pressing the
required character/letter in the list.
Deleting/changing characters/letters written
by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
Press the intended letter in the list (3).
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
Swipe horizontally from right to left
12
over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
the handwriting field
13
.
Related information
Managing text messages (p. 465)
Changing system settings in the settings
view (p. 172)
12
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
13
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
SAFETY
SAFETY
56
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys-
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's
driver and passengers in the event of an acci-
dent.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate
different safety systems, such as different types
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, rollover or driving off the road,
the systems react in different ways to provide the
best protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also
constructed so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
Warning symbol in driver display
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's elec-
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is
fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
is switched on during driving and the mes-
sage
SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems
does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
should be contacted as soon as possible.
If the specific warning symbol is broken
then the general warning symbol is illu-
minated instead and the driver display
shows the same message.
Related information
Safety during pregnancy (p. 56)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Airbags (p. 63)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 58)
Safety mode (p. 69)
Child safety (p. 71)
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
57
cle as they drive (which means that they must be
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer-
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the
seat with as large a distance as possible between
abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Manual front seat (p. 121)
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is a pro-
tection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy-absorbing backrests and seat
cushions, and specially designed head restraints
in the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. This
reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
rest.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the cor-
responding front seat must be moved forward
so that it does not make contact with the
folded backrest.
Seating position
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's func-
tion is not obstructed.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
58
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Manual front seat (p. 121)
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)
Child seats (p. 71)
Pedestrian Protection System
The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a
system which, in certain frontal collisions, con-
tributes to mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car.
In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the
sensors in the front of the car react and the sys-
tem is activated.
When PPS is activated, the following occur:
The rear section of the bonnet is raised.
An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On Call*.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
25-50 km/h (15-30 mph).
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to those
of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environ-
ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that
is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is
possible that the system will be activated in
the event of a collision with such an object.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change anything
in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front
may cause incorrect function in the system
and lead to serious injury and damage to the
car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms
are used and that only genuine parts are used
for them.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop in the event of any damage to
the front of the car in order to ensure that the
system is intact.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
PPS has been activated, or a fault
has occurred in the system. Follow
the recommendation given.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
SAFETY
}}
59
Seatbelt
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric
seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat-
belts in critical situations and collisions.
Seatbelt tensioner during collision
All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic
seatbelt tensioner.
The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the
seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient
force in order to more effectively restrain the
occupant.
Seatbelt tensioner during critical
situations
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support sys-
tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
critical situations, such as panic braking, sharp
evasive action, driving off the road (e.g. the car
rolls over into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits
some off-road object), skidding, or risk of colli-
sion, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seat-
belt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu-
pant to a better position, reducing the risk of
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
60
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
Once the critical situation has passed, the seat-
belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset
automatically.
If the belt still remains tensioned:
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
sioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
City Safety (p. 330)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 66)
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Fastening a seatbelt
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
SAFETY
61
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Press together the seat mounting and move
the seatbelt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against your throat.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
Unfastening a seatbelt
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
SAFETY
62
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
Driver display graphics
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
sengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphics are cleared automatically after
approximately 30 seconds of driving, or by press-
ing on the right-hand the steering wheel keypad's
O button.
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis-
play.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
either of them is not wearing one.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
stops when the seatbelt is refastened, or it
can be acknowledged manually by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering
wheel keypad.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
minates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's warning symbol illumi-
nates.
SAFETY
63
Related information
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable
curtains for driver and passengers.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following
is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Driver and passenger airbags (p. 64)
Side airbag (p. 68)
Inflatable curtain (p. 69)
SAFETY
64
Driver and passenger airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
equipped with airbags on the driver and passen-
ger sides in the front seat.
Driver and passenger airbags
1
.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
to protect the head, face and chest of the driver
and passenger as well as the knees and legs
1
of
the driver.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are
deployed.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Driver airbags
Airbag in the steering wheel
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag
1
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
Passenger airbag
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
65
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Related information
Airbags (p. 63)
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 66)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
66
Activating/deactivating the
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-
ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
Activating the passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
SAFETY
}}
67
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
The passenger airbag must always be acti-
vated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Deactivating the passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the passenger seat when
the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
||
SAFETY
68
Related information
Driver and passenger airbags (p. 64)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Child seats (p. 71)
Side airbag
The side airbags on the driver and passenger
seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a
collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
frames of the front seats and help to protect the
driver and passengers in the front seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbag and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
Airbags (p. 63)
Child seats (p. 71)
SAFETY
}}
69
Inflatable curtain
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
ing a collision.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine
parts that are approved for fitting within these
areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm space between the load and the
side windows if the car is loaded to above the
top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the
intended protection of the inflatable curtain,
which is concealed in the headlining, may be
compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
Airbags (p. 63)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
gered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
If the car has been involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See Owner's manual is shown
in the driver display together with the warning
symbol. This means that the car has reduced
functionality.
If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to try
to reset the system and then start and move the
car from a dangerous position.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that engaging an author-
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after
Safety mode See
Owner's manual has been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
||
SAFETY
70
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Starting/moving the car after safety mode
(p. 70)
Starting/moving the car after safety
mode
If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to
try to start and then move the car from a danger-
ous position.
Starting the car after safety mode
1. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
2.
Turn the start knob to STOP and release it.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems
check and then try to resume normal sta-
tus.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still shown on the display the car
must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
den damage may make the car impossible to
control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1.
If the message
Normal mode The car is
now in normal mode is shown in the driver
display after a start attempt, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Safety mode (p. 69)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
71
Child safety
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions and attachment devices)
which is designed for fitting in this particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti-
mum conditions are obtained for the child to
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as possible,
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front-
facing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
Related information
Safety (p. 56)
Child seats (p. 71)
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)
Child seats
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size.
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is impor-
tant to read the installation instructions
included.
Location of child seats
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
||
SAFETY
72
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
senger seat.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Child seat installation
The following points are important to consider
when a child seat is being fitted in the car.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Installation in the front seat
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
When fitting front-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is activated.
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console
2
accessory.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these
2
.
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
Installation in the rear seat
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-
Size
3
.
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
2
The accessory range varies depending on market.
3
Varies depending on market.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
73
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
Child safety (p. 71)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 73)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 74)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 66)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
74
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom-
mendations from the child seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 74)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 75)
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 75)
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 66)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 0+
max 13 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 1
9-18 kg
L
C
UF
A, D
U, L
C
U
Group 2
15-25 kg
L
C
UF
A
U
E, F
, B*
, G
, L
C
U
E
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
76
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 3
22-36 kg
X
UF
A
U
F, H
, B*
, G
U
H
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type
approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
F
Volvo recommends: Römer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312).
G
Volvo recommends: integrated booster cushion.
H
Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 78)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 81)
SAFETY
77
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
4
mount-
ing points for child seats in the rear seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
4
on
the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 73)
Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 81)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 78)
4
Names and symbols change depending on market.
SAFETY
78
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C
, X
D
X
IL
C
X
Group 0+
max 13 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C, E
, X
D
X
IL
C
XC Rear-facing child seat
D Rear-facing child seat
SAFETY
}}
79
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
A Front-facing child seat
X
IL
B, E, F
, X
D
IL
F
, IUF
F
XB Front-facing child seat
B1 Front-facing child seat
C Rear-facing child seat
IL
B, E
, X
D
X
IL
G
X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat.
F
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
G
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be included
on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo dealer for information about which i-
Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
||
SAFETY
80
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 81)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 75)
SAFETY
81
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R129.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-
ing child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats X X
i-U
A
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Related information
Child seats (p. 71)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 77)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 78)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 75)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
82
Integrated booster cushion*
The integrated booster cushions on the outer
seats in the rear seat allow children to sit com-
fortably and safely.
The booster cushion is specially designed to pro-
vide optimum safety. In combination with the
seatbelt it is approved for children who weigh
between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 97
cm in height.
Correct position, the seatbelt must pass over the shoul-
der.
Check before driving that:
the integrated booster cushion is in locked
mode
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec-
tion.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
is only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Do not make any modifications or
additions to the booster cushion. If an inte-
grated booster cushion has been subjected to
a major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire booster cushion must be
replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears
to be undamaged, it may not afford the same
level of protection. The booster cushion must
also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated booster
cushion are not followed then the child could
sustain serious injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
Related information
Child safety (p. 71)
Folding up the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 82)
Folding down the integrated booster cush-
ion* (p. 84)
Folding up the integrated booster
cushion*
The integrated booster cushions on the outer
seats in the rear seat are folded up for use.
The booster cushion can be folded up in two
positions. The position that should be used
depends on the weight of the child.
Lower position Upper position
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Lower position:
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
83
Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.
Upper position, start from the lower position:
Press the button to release the booster
cushion.
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated booster
cushion are not followed then the child could
sustain serious injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the booster seat
must first be fully lowered into the seat cush-
ion, and then folded up to the lower position.
Related information
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)
Folding down the integrated booster cush-
ion* (p. 84)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
84
Folding down the integrated
booster cushion*
The integrated booster cushions on the outer
seats in the rear seat can be folded down when
not in use.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the booster seat
must first be fully lowered into the seat cush-
ion, and then folded up to the lower position.
Pull the handle forwards to release the cush-
ion.
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the cush-
ion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the
booster cushion must be lowered first.
Related information
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 82)
Folding up the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 82)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
86
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Display/function/control
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tail-
gate opening/closing*, halogen head-
lamp levelling
Display/function/control
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
Display/function/control
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
Gear selector
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
87
Display/function/control
Ignition dial
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
power front seat*
Door mirrors
Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
doors and tailgate
Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors
Adjusting front seat
Instruments and controls, right-
hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
88
Display/function/control
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate,
opening/closing the tailgate*
Bonnet opening
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Display/function/control
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
Display/function/control
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
Gear selector
Display/function/control
Ignition dial
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
power front seat*
Door mirrors
Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
doors and tailgate
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
89
Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors
Adjusting front seat
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
90
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
indicator and warning symbols. The content of
the driver display depends on the car's equip-
ment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12-
inch and 8-inch.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
Driver display, 12-inch
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer
A
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge
ECO gauge
A
Odometer Clock Gear shift indicator
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Drive mode
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
91
On the left In the middle On the right
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information Fuel gauge
Media player Status of the Start/Stop function
Navigation map*
Distance to empty tank
Phone Instantaneous fuel consumption
Voice recognition App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Compass
A
A
Depending on selected drive mode.
Driver display, 8-inch
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
92
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Road Sign Information*
Phone
Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information
Navigation information*
Tachometer
A
Door and seatbelt information Clock
ECO gauge
A
Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Distance to empty tank Instantaneous fuel consumption
Outside temperature gauge Odometer
Indicator and warning symbols Trip meter
Indicator and warning symbols
Voice recognition
Engine temperature gauge
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Compass
A
A
Depending on selected drive mode.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
93
Location of adaptable symbol
Example of indicator symbol in the 12-inch driver display.
In the centre of the driver display, different sym-
bols can be shown for different types of mes-
sage. It may be in the form of an indicator or
warning symbol, or consist of an image sequence
that starts from this position and is then conver-
ted to a larger image.
Activating the driver display
The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
Depress the brake pedal.
Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I.
Open one of the doors.
Related information
Driver display settings (p. 94)
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 95)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 97)
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 105)
License agreement for the driver display
(p. 99)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
94
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display can be made in
the driver display's application menu, and in the
centre display's
Settings menu.
Settings in the app menu
In the app menu, you can choose which informa-
tion is shown on the driver display from
trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
The application menu in the driver display is
opened and navigated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the
application menu in the driver display".
Settings in the centre display
Selecting information type
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Driver
Display Information
.
3. Select what should be shown in the back-
ground:
Show no information in background
Show information for current playing
media
Show navigation even if no route is
set
1
.
The 12-inch driver display shows the infor-
mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver
display shows the information in the top
right-hand field.
Selecting theme
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on
System System Language to
select language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 105)
Settings view (p. 169)
1
The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in the
driver display".
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
95
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or
that a fault or abnormal condition exists.
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended, this
information symbol illuminates and
a text appears on the driver display.
The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there is
a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
Symbol Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot detect
or warn of low tyre pressure as
intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a work-
shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbols flash when the direc-
tion indicators are used.
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when the
automatic main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
the automatic main beam is off.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
96
Symbol Specification
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main
beam is on and with main beam
flash.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
Symbol Specification
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger com-
partment heater/air conditioning
are preconditioning the car.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating. If
the symbol illuminates with con-
stant glow then there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active driv-
ing experience. The system then
detects whether the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding of the rear sec-
tion up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
Symbol Specification
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Yellow symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
play.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 97)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
97
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or condition exists.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will
skid during heavy braking.
Symbol Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates
when a fault has been indicated
which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate
in conjunction with other symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in
a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated or
illuminates while driving, a fault has
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Visit the
nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a con-
stant glow when the parking brake
is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message
in the driver display.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
98
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driv-
ing if a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
play.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 95)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
Safety (p. 56)
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature gauge is shown in the
driver display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
car.
Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
8-inch driver display.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
play a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is within the range
+2°C to -5°C, a snowflake symbol is shown in the
driver display as a warning for potentially slippery
conditions. The snowflake symbol is also illumi-
nated briefly in the head-up display, if the car is
equipped with one.
Outside temperature gauge setting
Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
the centre display's top view.
Select Settings System Units of
Measurement
and select the required unit
type,
Metric, Imperial or US.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Climate control - sensors (p. 183)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
99
Clock
The clock is shown in both the driver display and
the centre display.
Location
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
In certain situations, messages and information
may cover the clock in the driver display.
Settings for time and date
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the centre display's top view to change set-
tings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down
arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
If the car is equipped with a navigation system
then
Auto Time can be selected. The time zone
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca-
tion of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with
Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Settings view (p. 169)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to oper-
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel-
oper.
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old"
License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
100
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
101
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
102
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm
<robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner
Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
103
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
104
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
SGI Free Software B License Version
2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
105
Application menu in the driver
display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
play provides quick access to commonly used
functions for certain apps.
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
of using the centre display.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel and take your eyes off the road.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associ-
ated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Selection of trip meter, selection
of what to show in the driver dis-
play, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation Pause guide, start guide to
recently used destination, etc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Using the application menu in the
driver display
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
106
Opening/closing the app menu
Press on open/close (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must be
confirmed before the app menu can be
opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1. Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 105)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
Messages in the driver display and
the centre display
The driver display and centre display can show
messages to inform or assist the driver in the
event of different events.
Driver display
Message in the driver display
2
.
2
With 8-inch driver display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
107
Message in the driver display
3
.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other infor-
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the
Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service
messages and their meanings.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Service urgent
Drive to work-
shop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immediately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Regular main-
tenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown before the next
service date.
Message Specification
Regular main-
tenance
Time for main-
tenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown at the next service
date.
Regular main-
tenance
Maintenance
overdue
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
3
With 12-inch driver display.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
108
Centre display
Message in the centre display.
The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
play's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has been
taken, the message disappears from the status
bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
tioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
Driver display (p. 90)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 110)
Managing messages in the driver
display and the centre display
Messages in the driver display and centre dis-
play are managed with the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad and in the centre display's
views.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
109
Driver display
Message in the driver display
4
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display
5
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2).
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automati-
cally after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the
Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
this.
Centre display
Message in the centre display.
Some messages in the centre display have a but-
ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
4
With 8-inch driver display.
5
With 12-inch driver display.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
110
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
the message to close automatically after a
while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 106)
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 110)
Managing messages saved from
the driver display and centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Messages saved from the driver display
Saved messages and possible options in the Car status
app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that need
to be saved are added in the
Car status app in the centre
display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
>
The saved message is shown in the
Car
status app.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom subview
of the home view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/
minimise a message.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
111
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have two
buttons available to book service or read the
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message:
In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment
6
for help in booking service.
>
With
Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With
Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
sage:
In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started.
Messages saved from the centre
display
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
of the centre display.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise
the message.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 106)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
6
Depending on market.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
112
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from the
driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
tion.
Incoming phone calls.
The head-up display shows warnings and infor-
mation relating to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road
sign information and incoming phone calls are
also shown in the head-up display.
IMPORTANT
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel.
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover
glass and make sure that no objects fall down
onto it.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates - read
the warning message in the driver dis-
play.
If the information symbol illuminates -
read the message in the driver display.
NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the follow-
ing:
use of polarising sunglasses
a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
objects on the display unit's cover glass
unfavourable light conditions.
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
head-up display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
113
City Safety in the head-up display
NOTE
When City Safety* is activated, the informa-
tion in the head-up display is replaced by a
graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi-
nated even if the head-up display is switched
off.
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
Activating/deactivating the head-up
display
This function can be activated/deactivated in two
ways via the centre display:
Via the function view
Press the Head-up display
button.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays.
3.
Select/deselect
Head-Up Display.
The option can be saved as a personal setting in
the driver profile.
NOTE
Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the
head-up-display can only be performed when
it shows a projected image. The car's engine
must be running.
Settings for head-up display
Select the option and adjust the settings for the
head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.
Selecting display options
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3. Select which functions should be shown:
Show Navigation
Show Road Sign Information
Show Driver Support
Show Phone.
The setting can be saved as a personal setting in
the driver profile.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
114
Adjusting brightness and vertical position
1.
Press the
Head-up display adjustments
button in the function view in the centre dis-
play.
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
Lowering the position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
the brightness in the car's other displays.
The vertical position can be stored in the memory
function of the power front seat*.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Calibration
.
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with
the steering wheel's right keypad.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Cleaning
Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean
and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois-
ten the microfibre cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be
used for more difficult cleaning.
When replacing the windscreen
Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
115
When replacing the windscreen - contact an
authorised workshop
7
. The correct version of the
windscreen must be fitted in order that the head-
up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly.
Related information
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
Settings view (p. 169)
Steering wheel (p. 131)
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 122)
Driver display (p. 90)
Voice recognition
8
The voice recognition system allows the driver to
use voice recognition to control certain functions
of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone,
the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys-
tem*.
Voice commands offer convenience and help the
driver to avoid being distracted, and instead con-
centrate on driving and focus attention on the
road and the traffic conditions.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Voice control system microphone
Voice recognition control takes place in dialogue
form with spoken commands from the user and
verbal response from the system. The voice rec-
ognition system uses the same microphone as
the Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice
recognition system's replies come via the car's
speakers. In some cases, a text message is also
shown in the driver display. Functions are con-
trolled from the right-hand steering wheel key-
pad. Settings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal perform-
ance, see support.volvocars.com.
7
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
8
Applies to certain markets.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
116
Related information
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 119)
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 120)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
Using voice recognition
9
Basic instructions for using voice recognition
control.
Depress the steering wheel
button for voice recognition
to activate the system and
initiate a dialogue using voice
commands.
Remember the following during communication:
For a command - speak after the tone in a
normal voice at normal speed.
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows
and sunroof closed.
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
by saying "
Cancel".
with a long press on the voice recognition
button on the steering wheel
.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.
Example of voice recognition control
Press , say “Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]" - calls the selected contact
from the phone book if the contact has more
than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile,
work), e.g.:
Press
, say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Commands/phrases
The following commands are always available for
use:
"
Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
"
Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
"
Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
replies with the commands available in the
current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions are described in
the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni-
tion control of the phone.
9
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
117
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individually
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty-
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
be given within the range 0-2300.
Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 119)
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 120)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
Settings for voice recognition
10
Several settings for the voice recognition system
can be made.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
System Voice Control and select
settings.
Repeat Voice Command
Gender
Speech Rate
Audio settings
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Sound System Volumes Voice
Control
and select settings.
Change language
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
.
Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
sage and help texts.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
System System Language and
select language.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 119)
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 120)
10
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
118
Voice recognition control of the
phone
11
Command for voice recognition control of a
Bluetooth-connected mobile phone to e.g. call a
contact, a number, or to listen to a message.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g.
Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers then the number category can also be
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
Tap on
and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book.
"
Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
"
Recent calls" - displays the call list.
"
Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
Voice recognition control of radio
and media
12
Command for voice recognition control of radio
and media player.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
"
Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
"
Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song.
"
Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
"
Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel.
"
Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
"
Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
radio frequency in the current frequency
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
band is started by default.
"
Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
"
Radio" - starts FM radio.
"
Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
"
Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
"
DAB " - starts DAB radio.
"
TV" - starts playback from TV*.
"
CD" - starts playback from CD*.
"
USB" - starts playback from USB.
"
iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"
Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected media source.
"
Similar music" — plays back music similar
to the music currently playing back from USB
devices.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
11
Applies to certain markets.
12
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
119
Voice recognition control of climate
control
13
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti-
vate a heated seat or change fan level.
Press and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
"
Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
"
Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature
setting one step.
"
Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's side.
"
Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
"
Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air flow.
"
Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
the air flow to Max/Off.
"
Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
"
Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
regulation.
"
Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
"
Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates the air circulation.
"
Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
and door mirrors.
"
Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
"
Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster
" - activates/deactivates
the heated windscreen*.
"
Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
"
Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
tivates the heated steering wheel*.
"
Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
"
Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
"
Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
"
Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
ventilation*.
"
Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
Climate control (p. 182)
13
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
120
Voice recognition and map
navigation
14
Command for voice control of the navigation
system, e.g. set destination or pause guidance.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue
and shows examples of commands.
"
Take me home" - Guidance is given to the
Home position.
"
Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti-
nation. Example "Drive to London".
"
Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address
as a destination. An address must contain
city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King
Street".
"
Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue
where two streets must be specified. The
intersection point of the specified streets
then becomes the destination.
"
Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post
code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2
3 4 5".
"
Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address
from the phone book as a destination. Exam-
ple "Drive to Robyn Smith".
"
Search [POI category]" - Searches for
adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer-
tain category (e.g. restaurants).
15
To have the
list sorted along the route - say "
Along the
route" when the results list is shown.
"
Search [POI category] in [City]" -
Searches for points of interest (POI) within a
certain category and city. The results list is
sorted according to the city's centre point.
Example "Search for restaurant in London".
"
Search [POI name]". Example "Search
Hyde Park".
"
Change country/Change state
16,
17
" -
Changes the search area for navigation.
"
Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi-
tions in the driver display.
"
Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored
intermediate destinations and final destina-
tion in an itinerary.
"
Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the
last spoken guidance.
"
Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off
voice guidance.
"
Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the
switched-off voice guidance.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition (p. 116)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
14
Applies to certain markets.
15
The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination.
16
In European countries, “Country” is used instead of “State”.
17
For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
121
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion* by pumping up/down.
Change the length of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Change the backrest rake by turning the
control knob.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Power front seat*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be
changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted
upward/downward/forward/backward.
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off.
Related information
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 122)
Manual front seat (p. 121)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
122
Adjusting the power front seat*
Set to desired sitting position using the control
on the front seat's seating section.
Change the lumbar support by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
adjusting the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
ing the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest rake by adjusting the
control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low-
ered fully forward.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 122)
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Using the memory function in the
power front seat*
The memory function stores settings for the seat,
door mirrors, and head-up display*.
It is possible to store two different settings with
the memory function. The memory function key-
pad is located either on one front door or both*.
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button
Memory button
Store setting
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position.
2.
Push the M button and release. The light
indicator in the button illuminates.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
123
3.
Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2
button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected memory button an acoustic sig-
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front door
either open or closed:
Open front door
Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or2
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
ton.
Closed front door
Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-
up display stop in the positions that are
stored in the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
be stopped.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the keypad. Check that there are
no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)
Multi-functional front seat*
Enhance the seating comfort using the multi-
function control.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
The multi-function control can, in some variants,
be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup-
port*, cushion length and massage settings*. Set-
tings made with the multi-function control are
shown in the centre display*. Certain function
selections can also be made directly in the centre
display.
Centre display
The driver and the passenger seat settings that
are made with the multi-function control are
shown in the centre display. If the settings for
only one of the front seats are shown in the cen-
tre display, the settings are positioned centred in
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
124
the screen. When it is possible to show setting
options for both the front seats, the driver's set-
ting options are shown in the upper half and the
passenger's in the lower half.
To stop showing the seat settings view in the
centre display, press the home button, which is
located under the centre display.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Adjusting functions in the multi-functional
front seat* (p. 124)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
Adjusting functions in the multi-
functional front seat*
Both the multi-function control on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display*.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
To activate the multi-function control, turn the
control upwards/downward.
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
massage is performed by air cushions that can
massage with different settings.
View for massage in the centre display.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Massage in the seat settings view.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
125
3. To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the touch
screen or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multi-function control's upper/
lower button. Change the setting in the
selected function by selecting directly in the
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by
using the multi-function control's front/rear
button.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select between Swell, Tread,
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and
High.
Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and
Fast.
Restarting massage
Button for restarting massage in the centre display.
The massage function is deactivated automati-
cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated
manually.
Tap on Restart in the centre display in order
to restart the selected massage program.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
It is not possible to use the massage function
when the engine is switched off.
Adjusting side support* in the front seat
backrests
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
vide side support.
View for adjustable side support in the centre display.
To adjust the side support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
126
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
Press the front seat button in order to
increase the side support.
Press the rear seat button in order to
reduce the side support.
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/
downward/forward/backward.
View for lumbar support in the centre display.
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
Press the seat button up/down to move
the lumbar support up/down.
Press the front seat button in order to
increase the lumbar support.
Press the rear seat button in order to
decrease the lumbar support.
Extending the seat cushion in the front
seat
Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
multi-function control on the seat.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
127
View for extension of the cushion in the centre display.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
Press the front seat button in order to
extend the seat cushion.
Press the rear seat button in order to
retract the seat cushion.
Related information
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 123)
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 110)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function can be activated in two ways via the
centre display:
Via the function view
Press the Adjust passenger
seat button to activate.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Seats.
3.
Select
Adjust Passenger Seat From
Driver Position to activate.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
128
Move the passenger seat forward/backward
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest rake
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 121)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 122)
Seatbelt (p. 59)
Rear seat
The car has 5 seats. The second seat row is
divided into two parts, with one or two passen-
ger seats respectively.
Related information
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 130)
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 128)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre
seat
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
129
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-
tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
The outer head restraints can be lowered in two
ways via the centre display:
Via the function view
Press the Headrest fold but-
ton to activate/deactivate low-
ering.
Via settings
The car's electrical system must be in the ignition
position II.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Seats.
3.
Select
Fold Headrest On Second Row
Seats to lower the rear outer head
restraints.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked posi-
tion after being raised.
Related information
Rear seat (p. 128)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 130)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
130
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be lowered forward
individually.
WARNING
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away.
Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrol-
led or careless adjustment can lead to trap-
ping injuries.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
IMPORTANT
The integrated booster cushions* on the
outer seats must be lowered before lowering
the seat.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must
be closed before lowering the seat.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest
Car with electronic folding
If the car is equipped with electronic folding of
the rear seat* there are buttons located in the
cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
manually.
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat.
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and right
backrest section respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
be stationary and the tailgate open.
To lower the backrest manually:
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
131
1. Lower the centre head restraint manually.
2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the
car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
is automatically lowered to the horizontal
position.
Car without electronic folding
If the car is only equipped with manual lowering
of rear seat:
1. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the
car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.
3. The seat is released from the lock but
remains in the same position. Lower the
backrest to the horizontal position.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
2. Slide the backrest until the catch engages.
3. The head restraint is raised manually.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Related information
Rear seat (p. 128)
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 128)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel has controls for horn, driver
support systems and voice recognition, amongst
other things.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems
18
.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis-
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
18
Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
132
Horn
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Related information
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 132)
Activating/deactivating heating of steering
wheel* (p. 205)
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Cruise control (p. 284)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 395)
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
Phone (p. 460)
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
133
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ-
ent ways depending on whether or not the car is
equipped with knee airbag
19
.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
With knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move
the lever back.
Without knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel.
1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
move the lever back.
Related information
Steering wheel (p. 131)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 272)
19
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
134
Headlamp control
Use the light controls in the left-hand stalk
switch to activate external lighting. Use the
thumbwheels in the instrument panel to adjust
headlamp levelling
20
and the brightness of the
interior lighting.
Rotating ring in the steering wheel stalk
switch
Position Specification
Daytime running lights when the
car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the car is run-
ning.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights and position
lamps when the car's electrical sys-
tem is in ignition position II or when
the car is running.
Position lamps when the car is
parked
A
.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights and position
lamps in daylight when the car's
electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion II or when the car is running.
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
The Active main beam function can
be activated.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the
rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used
when the vehicle is driven.
20
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
135
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to deter-
mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in the instrument panel
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with LED
21
headlamps* has automatic
headlamp levelling and therefore does not have
the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Adjusting the interior brightness
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used.
The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display
lighting, control lighting, ambient light and ambi-
ence light*.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
For different load cases and settings, see the
section "Headlamp levelling".
Related information
Passenger compartment lighting (p. 145)
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Position lamps (p. 136)
Headlamp levelling (p. 135)
Headlamp levelling
Headlamp levelling
22
is adjusted using one of
the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in ignition position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
beam alignment.
The position in which the thumbwheel should be
set for a number of load cases is shown below.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
Thumbwheel in position 0
Thumbwheel in position 1
21
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
22
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
136
Load case Thumb-
wheel
position
Only driver. 0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
1
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
220 kg load in the cargo area.
1
Driver and maximum load in the
cargo area.
2
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Position lamps
The position lamps are switched on with the
rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position
II or the car is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front posi-
tion lamps. However, this does not apply at sta-
tionary when the car is running, if the rotating
ring is moved to position
from another
position. In this case, the position lamps are
switched on.
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
switched on) to warn road users approaching
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver should
turn to a position other than
.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
137
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights are switched on
when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in
position
, or as well as when
the car's electrical system is in ignition position II
or when the car is running. For the
posi-
tion, this only applies in daylight. In weak daylight
or darkness, dipped beam is switched on
instead.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are switched on when the
car is driven in daylight. The car automatically
changes lighting from daytime running light to
dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness.
Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the
front fog lamp and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
At stationary when the car is running, the posi-
tion lamps are switched on instead of other light-
ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position
for position lamps,
, from another position.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Dipped beam (p. 137)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
in the
position, dipped beam is activated
automatically in weak daylight or darkness.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is activated automatically
in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's
electrical system is in ignition position II or when
the car is running.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
the front fog lamps* are activated
the rear fog lamp is activated
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
138
Dipped beam is always switched on when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position II or when the car is running.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
switch must be in
mode for tunnel detec-
tion to work.
Related information
Daytime running lights (p. 137)
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Activating/deactivating main beam
Main beam is activated with the stalk switch.
Active main beam is activated with the rotating
ring on the stalk switch.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main
beam flash position. Main beam comes on until
the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the steering
wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
23
or
. Activate main beam by moving
the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving
the stalk switch backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen
to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and
then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
23
When dipped beam is activated.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
139
Car with LED
24
headlamps*
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
ity
25
then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functional-
ity
25
then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu-
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom-
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activate/deactivate
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning
the stalk switch's rotating ring to position
and release. If active main beam is deactivated
while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately
reset to dipped beam.
When active main beam is activated, the symbol
illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
beam shines with slightly more than dipped
beam.
24
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
25
Depending on the car's equipment level.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
140
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
play, together with the message
Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed man-
ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
be in the
position. The symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
When active main beam becomes available again,
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
the message goes out and the
symbol illu-
minates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
mum beam pattern when conditions are
favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for man-
ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con-
ditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between
main and dipped beam may be required:
In heavy rain or dense fog
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
When there is traffic on connecting roads
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
Read more about the camera sensor's limitations
in the section "Limitations for City Safety".
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
141
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED
26
headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equip-
ment level.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
The LED headlamps can include the Active bend-
ing lights function, depending on the car's equip-
ment level. Active bending lights follow steering
wheel movements to provide maximum illumina-
tion in bends and junctions and thereby increase
safety.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-
tion, the
symbol illuminates in the driver
display at the same time as the driver display
shows an explanatory text.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is in activated mode when the car is
delivered from the factory and can be deacti-
vated/activated via the centre display in two
ways:
Via the function view
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Exterior Lights.
3.
Deselect/select
Active Bending Lights.
Related information
Settings view (p. 169)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 142)
Adapting the beam pattern from the
headlamps
If the car is equipped with LED headlamps with
adaptive functionality, then the headlamp pattern
should be reset when changing from right to left-
hand traffic, and vice versa.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern does not need to be
adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in
such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
LED headlamps*
The headlamp pattern should be adjusted if the
active main beam has adaptive functionality; see
the section "Activating/deactivating main beam".
The car must remain stationary and be running
when the headlamp pattern is changed between
right and left-hand traffic.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Exterior Lights.
3.
Select
Temporary Right Hand Traffic/
Temporary Left Hand Traffic.
Related information
Settings view (p. 169)
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)
26
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
142
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The front fog lamps have cornering lights that
shine diagonally to the side.
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
is in position
, or .
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps are switched off automati-
cally when the ignition knob is turned to STOP or
when the stalk switch's rotating ring is turned to
position
.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights
The front fog lamps include the cornering lights
function, which temporarily illuminates the area
diagonally in front of the car in the direction the
steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in
the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark-
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the
or position and the speed of the
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti-
vated via the centre display.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Rear fog lamp (p. 142)
Active bending lights* (p. 141)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users can
detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left-
hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right-
hand side on a right-hand drive car.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
position
or
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
143
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
the ignition knob is turned to STOP or when
the stalk switch's rotating ring is set in posi-
tion
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 142)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on
when one of driver support systems Adaptive
cruise control*, City Safety or Rear Collision
Warning brakes the car.
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 408)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
City Safety (p. 330)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)
Hazard warning flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction indi-
cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this
function is activated.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
144
Related information
Using direction indicators (p. 144)
Emergency brake lights (p. 408)
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend-
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
NOTE
This automatic flashing sequence can be
stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
Settings view (p. 169)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
145
Passenger compartment lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over-
head controls above the front seats and the rear
seat.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
from when:
the car has been switched off and its electri-
cal system is in ignition position 0
the car has been unlocked but it has not
been started.
Front lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Front reading lamps
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
The light indicator in the button illuminates when
the automatic function is activated. Press the
AUTO button to switch the passenger compart-
ment lighting on and off in accordance with the
following.
Passenger compartment lighting:
illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked
comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
remains on for two minutes if one of the side
doors is open.
Rear lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
146
Reading lamps above the rear seat
27
.
Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama
roof*.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
tively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting*
The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor
is switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
Ground lighting
The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Door sill lighting
The door sill lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Ambient light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Under
Ambient Light Level, select from
Reduced and Full.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted
using the control in the instrument panel:
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
ning.
27
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
147
The ambience lights can be changed via the cen-
tre display:
Changing the brightness of the lights
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under
Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose between
By Temperature, By
Colour and Theme Colours in order to
change the colour of the light.
With colour option
By Temperature, the
colour of the light changes according to the
set passenger compartment temperature.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambience light can be
adjusted using the controls in the instrument
panel:
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in storage compartments in doors is
switched on when the car is running. The bright-
ness can be finely adjusted using the control in
the instrument panel.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel
console
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
when the car is locked. The brightness can be
finely adjusted using the control in the instrument
panel.
Related information
Headlamp control (p. 134)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Settings view (p. 169)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
148
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lighting in the outside handles*
and number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
Approach light duration (p. 148)
Settings view (p. 169)
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control key during unlocking, the position lamps,
lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting,
interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch
on. If a door is opened within the activation time,
the time for the lighting in the outside handles*
and the interior lighting will be extended.
The function can be deactivated/activated via the
centre display.
Related information
Home safe light duration (p. 148)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Settings view (p. 169)
Using windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen.
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumbwheel when intermittent
wiping is selected.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
149
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip-
ers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear win-
dow) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Related information
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 149)
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)
Activating/deactivating the rain
sensor
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv-
ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
symbol
is shown in the driver display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition posi-
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
sor button
.
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv-
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk switch
up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service position has
been deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor while the car is running
or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
150
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can be
activated in such a way that the rain sensor but-
ton does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)
Rear window wiper and washer (p. 151)
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is
started by means of the right-hand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto-
matically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid
Level low, refill
, together with the symbol,
is shown in the driver display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-
screen and the visibility through it.
Related information
Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)
Rear window wiper and washer (p. 151)
Filling washer fluid (p. 533)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
151
Rear window wiper and washer
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling-
down period.
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
Select for intermittent wiping with the
rear window wiper.
Select for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Activating/deactivating wiping when
reversing
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate wiping when reversing.
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func-
tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Related information
Using windscreen wipers (p. 148)
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 149)
Power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil-
dren from being able to open the rear doors
from inside and open/close the rear win-
dows.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
Related information
Operating power windows (p. 152)
Child safety locks (p. 261)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
152
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by setting the car's electrical
system in ignition position 0 and then take
the remote control key with you when leaving
the car.
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors can only operate the
power window in the individual door. Only one
control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be at least I. The power
windows can be operated for a few minutes after
the car has been switched off and after the igni-
tion has been switched off - although not after a
door has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the win-
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement.
It is possible to override the pinch protection
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has
formed on the window. After two successive clos-
ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over-
ridden and the automatic function deactivated for
a short while, now it is possible to close by hold-
ing the button in its raised position.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (112 mph), but they
can be closed.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
153
Operating with the remote control key, door
handle or central locking button
To control the power windows from the outside
with the remote control key or door handle, or
from the inside with the central locking button,
see the section "Remote control key", "Locking/
unlocking from the outside" or "Locking/unlock-
ing from the inside".
Resetting
If the starter battery is disconnected then the
function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
raise the window to its end position and hold
it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Related information
Power windows (p. 151)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)
Using the sun blind*
Sun blinds are built into each rear door.
In the rear door - manually operated
Hook with associated catch
Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the
hook in the upper door frame.
The window can still be opened and closed with
the sun blind up.
Adjusting the door mirrors
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel.
Controls for door mirrors.
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to pro-
vide optimal vision. Objects may appear fur-
ther away than they actually are.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
154
Memory function in power front seat*
Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem-
ory function of the power front seat.
Angling the door mirror when parking
28
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
28
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is
automatically angled down so that the driver can
see the side of the road when parking for exam-
ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
a short time.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated via the
centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the interior rearview and door mirrors.
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear-
view mirror".
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
apart from when gearbox reverse position is
selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
and the door mirrors.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
28
Only in combination with power seat with memory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
155
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(ignition position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
cally stop in the fully extended position.
Related information
Interior rearview mirror (p. 155)
Settings view (p. 169)
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 122)
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim-
ming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control
towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
dimming is not available on mirrors with auto-
matic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
the light from vehicle headlights behind.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
sors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
apart from when gearbox reverse position is
selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
and the door mirrors.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
156
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)
Settings view (p. 169)
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Activating/deactivating the compass
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass:
Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Related information
Calibrating the compass* (p. 157)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
157
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is
moved between several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri-
cal equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear-
view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of
the current magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-
acter
C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
Compass* (p. 156)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
158
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
tions. The front section can be opened vertically
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
tally (open position). The rear section is fixed
roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector.
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per-
forated fabric and located under the glass roof to
provide extra protection from factors such as
strong sunlight.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
The control is activated when the car's electrical
system is in ignition position I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.
Always operate the panorama roof with
caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panorama roof by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panorama roof when load
carriers are fitted.
Wind deflector
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 159)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
159
Operating the panorama roof*
When operating with the control in the roof, the
panoramic roof is first opened horizontally to a
comfort position.
In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the
roof is raised at the rear.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.
Always operate the panorama roof with
caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panorama roof by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panorama roof when load
carriers are fitted.
In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind
can be operated, the car's electrical system must
be in at least ignition position I.
Operating with the control in the roof
Opening, manual
Opening, automatic
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual open-
ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum
opening position for as long as the control is
held depressed rearward.
2. Open the panorama roof - press the control
backwards a second time to the position for
manual opening. The panoramic roof first
reaches comfort position
29
. In order to open
to maximum opening position - press the
control backwards a third time.
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the manual closing position
instead.
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
trol is released or when the glass reaches the
comfort position or the maximum opening or
closing position.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be closed.
29
Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
160
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. To open the panorama roof, press the control
backwards a second time to the position for
automatic opening and release. The panor-
amic roof first reaches comfort position
29
. To
open to the maximum opening position -
press the control a third time backward to
the position for automatic opening and
release.
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the automatic closing posi-
tion instead.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the
glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi-
mum opening or closing position. The movement
is also stopped if the control is operated again in
the opposite direction to the direction of move-
ment in progress.
The movement of the roof is not stopped when
the glass reaches the comfort position when
closing from maximum opening position.
Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing
The panorama roof and sun blind can be
opened/closed simultaneously:
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
To close - press the control forward/down-
ward to the automatic operation position
twice and release.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the
glass reaches the comfort position or the closing
position. The movement is also stopped if the
control is operated again in the opposite direction
to the direction of movement in progress.
The movement of the roof is not stopped when
the glass reaches the comfort position when
closing from maximum opening position. The
movement of the blind is never stopped when the
roof reaches comfort position.
Ventilation position
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward.
Close by pressing the control forward/down-
ward.
When the ventilation position is selected the front
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically
approx. 50 mm.
Automatic closing of the sun blind
When the car is parked in sunny/hot weather, the
sun blind closes automatically 15 minutes after
the car is locked. This is in order to lower the
passenger compartment temperature and protect
the car upholstery from being bleached by the
sun.
29
Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
161
The function is deactivated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be activated/deac-
tivated:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
Closing using the remote control key,
central locking button or door handles
Remote control key
Give a long press on the remote control key's
lock button
until the panorama roof and
sun blind start moving towards the closed
position. Then release the lock button.
Movement stops if the remote control key's lock
button is pressed again or when the roof/blind
has reached the closed position.
Central locking button
Central locking button.
When the car's electrical system is set in at least
ignition position I, the central locking button in
the driver's door or passenger door* can be used
to close the panoramic roof.
Give a long press on the central locking but-
ton
until the panorama roof and sun blind
start moving towards the closed position.
Then release the button.
Movement stops if the central locking button is
pressed again or when the roof/blind has
reached the closed position.
Door handle
Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*
have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of
the outside door handle.
Place your finger against the touch-sensitive
recess on the outside of one of the door
handles until the panorama roof and sun
blind start moving towards the closed posi-
tion. Then remove your finger from door han-
dle's recess.
Movement stops if you place your finger against
the door handle recess again or once the roof/
blind has reached the closed position.
WARNING
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
control key, the central locking button or door
handle, check that no one risks being trapped.
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx. 50
mm from the blocked position (or to full ventila-
tion position). The pinch protection is also active
when the glass cover or sun blind is opened.
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
162
blind once more in the same direction without
pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds
after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore
possible to override the pinch protection when
closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has
formed around the glass cover, by continually
pressing the control forward/downward until the
glass cover and/or sun blind is closed.
Related information
Panorama roof* (p. 158)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
HomeLink
®
*
30
HomeLink
®
is a programmable remote control
that is integrated into the car's electrical system.
General
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
HomeLink
®31
is a programmable remote control
that can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys-
tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus
replace their remote controls. HomeLink
®
is sup-
plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The
HomeLink
®
panel consists of three programma-
ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror
glass.
For more information about HomeLink
®
, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277).
WARNING
If HomeLink
®
is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
the door or gate while it is in motion.
While programming HomeLink, the
garage door or gate being programmed
may activate. For this reason, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or
gate while programming is in progress.
The car should be outside the garage
while a garage door opener is being pro-
grammed.
Do not use HomeLink
®
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
30
Applies to certain markets.
31
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
163
mended that the programming for the buttons is
deleted when the car is sold; see the section
"Programming HomeLink
®
".
Related information
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 163)
Programming HomeLink
®
*
32
Instructions for programming HomeLink
®
.
Programming HomeLink
®
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
HomeLink
®
can be programmed or used.
Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con-
trol that will be replaced by HomeLink
®
for
faster programming and improved transmis-
sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink
®
but-
tons should be reset before programming,
see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons". When the reset is complete,
HomeLink
®
is set in "learn mode" and ready
for programming.
1.
Press the
33
button on HomeLink
®
you want
to program. The indicator lamp
33
on
HomeLink
®
should flash yellow once per
second. It is not necessary to hold the button
depressed.
2. Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and
hold it 2-8 cm from the button. Do not
obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink
®
.
Note: Some remote controls can program
HomeLink
®
better at a distance of
15-20 cm. Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming.
3. Press and hold the button on the original
remote control to be programmed on
HomeLink
®
and keep an eye on the indicator
lamp. Do not release the button until the
indicator lamp has switched from flashing
yellow once per second to either flashing
green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow. The button on the
remote control can be released once the
indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green.
Note: For some receivers, programming step
3 may need to be replaced with the instruc-
tions in step 4.
4. Press and release the button on the original
remote control every other second until the
indicator lamp has changed from flashing
yellow once per second to either flashing
green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow.
32
Applies to certain markets.
33
See section "HomeLink
®
*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
164
5.
Depress the programmed HomeLink
®
button
and check the indicator lamp.
>
Constant green glow: If the indicator
lamp illuminates in a constant green glow,
programming is complete. The garage
door, gate or similar should now be acti-
vated when the programmed button is
depressed.
Flashes green 10 times per second:
Depress the button being programmed,
hold it depressed for 2 seconds and
then release it. Repeat the sequence of
pressing/holding/releasing a second time
and, depending on the receiver model,
even a third time. Programming should
now be complete and the garage door,
gate or similar should now be activated
when the programmed button is
depressed.
If the receiver is still not activated:
Continue with programming steps 6-8 to
complete programming.
6.
Locate programming button
34
on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located near the antenna bracket on
the receiver.
7. Depress and release the receiver's program-
ming button. Step 8 must be completed
within 30 seconds of the button being
depressed.
8.
Depress the button being programmed, hold
it depressed for 2 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the sequence of press-
ing/holding/releasing a second time and,
depending on the receiver model, even a
third time. Programming is now be com-
plete and the garage door, gate or similar
should now be activated when the pro-
grammed button is depressed.
Operation
When HomeLink
®
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). The indicator lamp illu-
minates or flashes when the button has been
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink
®
if
required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
®
will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink
®
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. However, individual buttons can be
reprogrammed; see the section "Programming
individual buttons" below.
34
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
165
1.
Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink
®
and
hold them depressed until the indicator lamp
begins flashing green (about 10 seconds).
2. Release the buttons.
>
HomeLink
®
is now set to "learn mode"
and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the
section "Programming HomeLink
®
"
above.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
®
button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator
lamp on HomeLink
®
starts to flash yellow,
start with step 1 from the section "Program-
ming HomeLink
®
" above.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
For more information or to provide feedback
about HomeLink
®
, visit www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277).
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 162)
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
play.
12-inch driver display.
8-inch driver display.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto-
matically if the car is not used for at least four
hours.
The following information is registered while driv-
ing:
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
166
Mileage
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption.
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second.
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the remaining mile-
age with the fuel available in the tank.
The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining
driveable fuel quantity.
No guaranteed range remains when the gauge
shows "----". In which case, refuel as soon as
possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 166)
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 168)
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated val-
ues can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
the app menu, you can choose which information
is shown on the driver display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
167
Open and navigate in the app menu
35
using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1. Open the app menu in the driver display by
pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must be
confirmed before the app menu can be
opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver dis-
play:
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Odometer
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis-
play of mileage
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O but-
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter TM with one long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch.
Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The
meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours
or more.
Change unit
Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the
centre display as follows:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Units.
3.
Under
Units of Measurement, select the
required unit standard:
Metric, Imperial or
US.
35
The appearance of the display may vary depending on instrument variant.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
168
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
tem*.
Related information
Trip computer (p. 165)
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 168)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driving
time are calculated since the last time the trip
statistics were reset.
Trip statistics from the trip computer
36
.
Settings for trip statistics
Press Preferences to
change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10
or 100 km/miles for the bar.
reset data after every trip. Performed when
the car has been stationary for more than
4 hours.
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption
and total driving time are always reset simultane-
ously.
Change unit
Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption,
etc. via the centre display as follows:
36
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
169
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Units.
3.
Under
Units of Measurement, select the
required unit standard: Metric, Imperial or
US.
Related information
Trip computer (p. 165)
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 166)
Settings view
Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre dis-
play's settings view.
Opening/closing and navigating in the
settings view
Top view with button for Settings.
1. Drag down the tab at the top of the centre
display to open the top view.
2.
Press
Settings to open the settings view.
3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
gate to subcategories and
Settings by
pressing again.
4.
Press
Back to go back in the settings view.
Press Close to close the settings view.
Changing a setting
A subcategory in the settings view with different types of
settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
1. Press on categories and subcategories to
navigate to the required setting.
2. Change one or more settings. Different types
of settings are changed in different ways
(see the table below for a description of each
type).
> The changes are saved immediately.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
170
Types of settings
There are several different types of settings:
Setting
type
Description
Trigger
function
Starts an app or separate view
for more advanced settings
through a press on the text, e.g.
to connect a device with
Bluetooth.
Radio but-
ton
Select a setting from several
options by pressing the required
radio button, e.g. to select a sys-
tem language.
Multi-
selector
button
Select a level for something by
pressing the required part of the
button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
level for City Safety.
Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by
pressing on the box to select/
deselect it, e.g. to select auto-
matic start of seat heating.
Slider Select a level for something
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select
volume level.
Display of
informa-
tion
No actual setting. Shows infor-
mation about something, e.g. the
car's identification number.
Related information
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Categories in the settings view (p. 170)
Categories in the settings view
The settings view has a number of main catego-
ries and subcategories where settings and infor-
mation for many of the car's functions are collec-
ted.
The settings view has 7 main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of sub-
categories and setting options. The tables below
show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual. For system settings not descri-
bed in the corresponding section, see the section
"Changing system settings in the settings view".
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to a
Driver Profiles. Other
settings are global, which means they are not
linked to a driver profile. The tables below provide
an overview showing whether a category's set-
tings are personal, global or a mixture of both.
My Car
Subcategories Settings
Displays
Personal
IntelliSafe
Mixed
Park Assist
Global
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
Subcategories Settings
Drive Mode/Individual Drive
Mode
*
Mixed
Lights and Lighting
Mixed
Mirrors and Easy Entry
Personal
Locking
Mixed
Parking Brake and Suspension
Mixed
Seats
Mixed
Wipers
Mixed
Suspension
Global
Sound
Subcategories Settings
Sound Experience*
Personal
Tone
Personal
Balance
Personal
System Volumes
Mixed
Navigation
Subcategories Settings
Map
Personal
Route and Guidance
Personal
Subcategories Settings
Traffic
Personal
Guidance
Personal
System
Personal
Media
Subcategories Settings
AM/FM radio
Personal
DAB
Personal
Gracenote®
Personal
Video
Personal
Communication
Subcategories Settings
Phone
Text Messages
Bluetooth Devices
Wi-Fi
Global
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Global
Car Modem Internet
Global
Subcategories Settings
Volvo On Call
Volvo Service Networks
Global
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcatego-
ries.
System
Subcategories Settings
Driver Profile
Personal
Date and Time
System Language
Personal
Keyboard Layouts
Global
Voice Control
Personal
Units
Personal
Storage
Software Updates
Factory reset
Services
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
172
Related information
Settings view (p. 169)
Changing system settings in the settings
view (p. 172)
Changing system settings in the
settings view
The
System category in the settings view col-
lects general settings and information for car
systems, such as language and units.
The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
and Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control,
Software Updates, Factory reset, Factory
Reset and Services are described in the corres-
ponding section of the owner's manual.
Changing system language
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System System Language.
3. Select system language. Languages that
support voice recognition have a voice recog-
nition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display is changed.
Changing system units
Changing length and volume units
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Units Units of
Measurement
.
3. Select from the following unit standards:
Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> The units in the driver display, centre dis-
play and head-up display are changed.
See storage information
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Storage.
> Storage information for the car's hard disk
is shown, including total capacity, available
capacity and how much space installed
applications are using.
See the car's vehicle identification
number
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Vehicle Identification
Number
.
> The car's vehicle identification number
(VIN
37
) is shown.
37
Vehicle Identification Number.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
173
Related information
Categories in the settings view (p. 170)
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Clock (p. 99)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
System updates (p. 513)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
Book service and repair (p. 510)
Resetting settings in the settings
view
It is possible to reset all modified settings in the
settings view to their default values at once.
Types of resets
There are three different types of resets for set-
tings in the settings view:
Factory Reset - clears all data and media
and resets all settings to their default values.
Reset Car Settings - resets global settings
to their default values.
Reset Personal Settings - clears personal
data and resets personal settings to their
default values.
Resetting settings
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Press
OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Related information
Changing system settings in the settings
view (p. 172)
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Resetting user data for change of ownership
(p. 179)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
174
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
erences and can be saved in one or more driver
profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved in
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
car is adapted to the settings of that specific
driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings made in the car will be auto-
matically saved in the active driver profile if the
profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a
driver profile". Settings made in the car are either
personal or global. Only personal settings are
saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
files.
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver profiles.
They remain the same regardless of which driver
profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add
additional languages to the keyboard, these
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis-
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X -
the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Refer to the section "Categories in the settings
view" for more information on which settings are
personal and which are global.
Related information
Editing a driver profile (p. 175)
Categories in the settings view (p. 170)
Selecting driver profile (p. 174)
Selecting driver profile
The last used driver profile is the one selected
when the car is unlocked. It is possible to
change to another driver profile after the car has
been unlocked.
When the centre display has been started, the
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
screen. The driver profile last used is the one that
will be active next time the car is unlocked. How-
ever, if the remote control key has been linked to
a driver profile then this is what is selected when
the car is started. See "Linking remote control
key to driver profile".
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
in the top of the centre display when the dis-
play has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
175
2.
Press
Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Editing a driver profile (p. 175)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 176)
Editing a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different
driver profiles used in the car.
All types of changes to driver profiles are made
from the top view in the centre display -
Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Renaming a driver profile
Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver
Profile window:
1.
Press
Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
2.
Tap in the box
Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to
change the name. Tap on
to close
the keyboard.
3.
Save the name change by tapping on
Back/
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Factory Reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select one of the options
Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
176
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Selecting driver profile (p. 174)
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
is used with that specific remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it is
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
car is started, the
Guest profile will automatically
be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver
profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select the desired profile. The
Guest profile
cannot be linked to a key.
4.
Drag down the top view and tap on
Settings
System Driver Profiles Edit
Profile
.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
file to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
>
When the message
Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6.
Press
OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
177
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Editing a driver profile (p. 175)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Importing/exporting a driver profile
from/to USB
The personal settings saved in the driver profiles
can be exported/imported to other cars via USB.
Follow these steps in order to import/export a
driver profile from/to a USB memory:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Driver Profiles.
USB socket in tunnel console.
3. Insert a USB memory in the tunnel console.
4.
Select
Import profile from USB/Export
profile to USB.
NOTE
Only one USB memory can remain inserted in
the port while profiles are being imported and
exported. If there is more than one then there
is the risk that the profile is saved to the
wrong USB memory or that the car cannot
find a profile to import.
NOTE
A number of profiles can be exported to a
USB memory, but only one profile can be
imported at a time. When a profile is imported
it overwrites the car’s current profile. The pro-
file name is also written over.
The guest profile cannot be exported or
imported.
5. Select the profile to be imported or the pro-
file(s) to be exported.
> The current driver profile is overwritten
when a new one is imported.
6.
Select
OK.
If the export fails, it may be due to the following:
The USB memory is full.
The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or
was pulled out during the export.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
178
If the import fails, it may be due to the following:
The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or
was pulled out during the import.
There is no driver profile saved on the USB
memory.
The file for the driver profile on the USB
memory is corrupt.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Changing settings for apps
All of the car's apps are listed in the app view.
The app settings that relate to the car's embed-
ded functions can be changed from the centre
display's top view.
Apps for embedded functions - basic
apps
The apps installed in the car from the beginning,
e.g.
FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
Change the settings for a basic app
1.
Tap on the app, e.g.
FM radio.
2. Drag down the top view.
3.
Press
FM Radio Settings.
4. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
5. Press either the physical home button or the
virtual close button.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all. Refer to the section
"Categories in the settings view" for more infor-
mation on how settings are changed.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g.
Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
Related information
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
Settings view (p. 169)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
Categories in the settings view (p. 170)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
179
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user data
and system settings should be restored to fac-
tory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
change of ownership. In the event of a change of
ownership it is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
Related information
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
Volvo ID (p. 23)
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
182
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate con-
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
2-zone climate
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
tons in the centre console.
4-zone climate*
Climate zones with 4-zone climate.
With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
tons in the centre console. The functions for the
rear seat can also be controlled from the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
Climate control - sensors (p. 183)
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
Air quality (p. 184)
Climate controls (p. 186)
Air distribution (p. 197)
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 119)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
183
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sen-
sors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the right-
hand door mirror.
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger com-
partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also
an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate
control system air intake.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
ture.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Climate control - sensors (p. 183)
Regulating the temperature (p. 190)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
184
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger com-
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
high.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec-
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
the modifications for Clean Zone Interior
Package* and the air quality system Interior Air
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment.
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function checks whether or not
all conditions have been met for good air quality
in the passenger compartment.
The indicator is visible in the climate view in
the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that are checked:
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the con-
ditions for good air quality have been met.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)
Cleaning the interior (p. 554)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
185
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec-
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is fitted.
Related information
Air quality (p. 184)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)
Volvo service programme (p. 510)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises
a series of modifications that keep the passen-
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and
asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
tion starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
Air quality (p. 184)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 185)
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
matic air quality system that separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
contaminants in the passenger compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
level ozone.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
partment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.
Activating/deactivating the air quality
sensor
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
186
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac-
tivate the air quality sensor.
Related information
Air quality (p. 184)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 185)
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 196)
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are con-
trolled from the centre display, physical buttons
in the centre console and the climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console*.
Overview of climate controls
Climate controls in the centre display.
Defrost buttons in the centre console.
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console*.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 188)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
187
Climate controls in the centre
display
All climate functions can be regulated from the
climate row and the climate view in the centre
display.
Climate row
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Temperature controls for driver and passen-
ger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli-
mate settings.
Climate view
One tap on the centre button in the climate row
gives access to the climate view. The climate view
is divided into the tabs
Main climate, Rear
climate
* and Parking climate*. Change
between the tabs by swiping left/right or by
pressing the respective heading.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli-
mate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
188
Rear climate control*
All climate functions for the rear seat can be
regulated in the
Rear climate tab.
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func-
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regula-
ted in the
Parking climate tab.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 190)
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 196)
Changing the air distribution (p. 198)
Regulating the fan level (p. 193)
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 189)
Regulating the temperature (p. 190)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
Activating/deactivating ventilation of the
seats* (p. 204)
Activating/deactivating heating of steering
wheel* (p. 205)
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Climate controls at the rear of the
tunnel console*
The rear seat's climate functions are controlled
from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel
console.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Fan controls for rear seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 203)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
189
Regulating the fan level (p. 193)
Regulating the temperature (p. 190)
Auto-regulating the climate
With an auto-regulated climate, several climate
functions are controlled automatically by the cli-
mate control system.
Auto-regulation automatically controls the air
recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution.
Auto-regulation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Give a short or long press on
AUTO.
Temperature and fan level are changed
depending on whether a short or long press
is given:
Short press - resets to previous settings
for auto-regulated climate control.
Long press - changes to default settings:
22 °C/72 °F and level
3 (level 2 in the
rear seat
1
).
> Auto-regulation of the climate is acti-
vated/deactivated and the button illumi-
nates/extinguishes.
Related information
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
1
For cars with 4-zone climate*.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
190
Activating/deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
Activating/deactivating the main air
conditioning
The air conditioning button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panorama
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in
Off position.
Related information
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Regulating the temperature
The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right-hand sides. With 4-zone climate*
the temperature can also be set separately for
the front and rear seats.
Regulating temperature for front seat
2
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to
open the controls.
2
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
191
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture, or
press
+/ to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
Synchronising the temperature
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
the centre display's climate row in order to
open the controls.
2.
Press
Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car is
synchronised with the temperature set for
the driver's side and the synchronisation
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on
Synchronise temperature or by changing the
passenger side or rear seat* temperature set-
tings.
Regulating temperature for rear seat*
From the front seat
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button to open the control.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
192
Temperature control.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
following:
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture
press
+/ to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
From the rear seat
Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of
the tunnel console.
Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons
on the tunnel console's climate panel in
order to lower/raise the temperature gradu-
ally.
> The temperature changes and the screen
in the climate panel shows the set tem-
perature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 188)
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
193
Regulating the fan level
The fan can be set to five different automatic fan
levels as well as
Off and Max. With 4-zone cli-
mate* the fan level can be set separately for the
front and rear seats.
Regulating fan level for front seat
3
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
Off, 1-5 or Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
From the front seat
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the
climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
1-5.
The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
by tapping on
2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
From the rear seat
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-
nel console.
Press the desired fan level, Off or 1-5 on the
tunnel console climate panel.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
3
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
194
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Related information
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 188)
Activating/deactivating defrost of
windows and door mirrors
The three functions max defroster, heated wind-
screen*, and heated rear window and door mir-
rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice
from the windows and door mirrors.
From physical buttons in the centre
console
The centre console contains physical buttons for
quick access to the defrost functions.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
only be activated individually from the climate
view in the centre display.
Physical buttons in the centre console.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
Cars without heated windscreen:
Press the button (1).
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters:
Press the button (2).
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
195
From the climate view in the centre
display
Activating/deactivating max defroster
Max defroster button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to
5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the pre-
vious settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
Activating/deactivating heated windscreen*
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the per-
formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.
NOTE
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
196
Activating/deactivating heated rear window
and door mirrors
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated windows
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen* and heated rear window and
door mirrors should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start when there is a risk of
ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The
heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
screen.
Select
Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Activating/deactivating air
recirculation
The air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment, by
means of no outside air being drawn into the
car.
The air recirculation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
197
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
when max defroster is activated.
Activating/deactivating the timer for air
recirculation
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Air distribution
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Overview of air distribution
Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4-
zone climate.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate running the air distri-
bution takes place automatically. If necessary, the
air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
There are 6 or 8* adjustable air vents in the pas-
senger compartment depending on the climate
control system.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-
partment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors.
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensi-
tive to air flows and draughts.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Changing the air distribution (p. 198)
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 199)
CLIMATE CONTROL
198
Table of air distribution options (p. 201)
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 189)
Changing the air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
ing air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 197)
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 199)
Table of air distribution options (p. 201)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
199
Opening/closing and aiming the air
vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer
vents are aimed toward the side windows, then
misting can be removed.
If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening/closing the air vents
Air vents for the front seat:
Air vent knob
4
.
Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
Air vents for the rear seat:
The air vent's thumbwheel
4
.
Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
the air flow from the nozzle.
The longer the white lines on the thumb-
wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
4
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
200
Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever
4
.
Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 197)
Changing the air distribution (p. 198)
Table of air distribution options (p. 201)
4
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
201
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from
other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
202
Air distribution Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the
floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument
panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 197)
Changing the air distribution (p. 198)
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 199)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
203
Activating/deactivating heating of
the seats*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating/deactivating heating of the
front seat*
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for heated seats is immediately available in
the climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Activating/deactivating heating of the
rear seat*
From the front seat*
Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
From the rear seat
With 2-zone climate:
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-
sole.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium
and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
With 4-zone climate*:
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
204
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel
console's climate panel to switch between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the
climate panel shows the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated seats
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off,Low,Medium or High in order to
activate/deactivate the automatic starting of
the heating for the driver and passenger
seats and to select the level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 188)
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the seats*
The seats can be ventilated, for example, to
remove moisture from clothes.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
The system can be activated when the engine is
running and takes seat temperature, solar radia-
tion and outside temperature into consideration.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
205
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the front seat*
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
tilated seats is immediately available in the
climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully
by people sensitive to draughts. Level
Low is
recommended for long-term use.
IMPORTANT
Seat ventilation cannot be started if the pas-
senger compartment temperature is too low.
This is in order to avoid cooling down the per-
son sitting in the seat.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
206
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated steering wheel
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac-
tivated when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in
order to activate/deactivate the automatic
starting of steering wheel heating and to
select the level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 186)
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 187)
Steering wheel (p. 131)
Parking climate*
The climate of the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned or maintained while the
car is parked.
Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con-
trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis-
play's climate view.
Preconditioning
Preconditioning of the car before driving reduces
wear and energy needs during a journey.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the
passenger compartment to the current outer
temperature.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Climate comfort retention
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
207
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli-
mate, heats the passenger compartment to
comfort temperature.
The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the
passenger compartment to the current outer
temperature.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
Climate control (p. 182)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 210)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 212)
Heater* (p. 213)
Parking heater* (p. 214)
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
Preconditioning warms the passenger compart-
ment and engine or airs the passenger compart-
ment before driving. The function can use direct
start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
Starting/stopping from the centre
display
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extin-
guished.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
senger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. The pre-
conditioning warms the passenger compartment
to the comfort temperature or airs it to the cur-
rent outer temperature.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
208
To be able to also cool the passenger compart-
ment to the comfort temperature (with the car's
air conditioning) the engine remote start function
Engine Remote Start - ERS
5
via the Volvo On
Call* app. can be used.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 210)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 212)
Heater* (p. 213)
Timer for preconditioning*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning
is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
A time on a single date
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without repetition.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
(p. 208)
Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
ditioning* (p. 210)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 212)
Setting the timer for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
5
Certain car models and markets.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
209
3.
Press
Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
add a new one.
4.
Tap on
Date to set the time for a single date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
days of the week.
With
Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
5.
With
Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
With
Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
7.
Tap on
Confirm in order to add the time set-
ting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Deleting a time setting
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Edit list.
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
>
The icon changes to the text
Delete.
5.
Press
Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the list.
Related information
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)
Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
ditioning* (p. 210)
Heater* (p. 213)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
210
Activating/deactivating the timer for
preconditioning*
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Related information
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
(p. 208)
Heater* (p. 213)
Starting/switching off climate
comfort retention*
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
in the passenger compartment after driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre dis-
play.
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
211
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20 °C.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
212
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Symbol Message Specification
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
shop
A
to check the function.
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 207)
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 210)
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 208)
Heater* (p. 213)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
213
Heater*
The heater helps the engine and passenger
compartment reach the correct temperature
before and during driving.
The heater has two subfunctions:
Parking heater - heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment, if necessary, when the
parking climate control's preconditioning* is
activated.
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur-
ing driving.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the heater is active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
battery if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling
6
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check in the driver display that the heater is
switched off. The heat symbol is shown when
it is operating.
Related information
Parking heater* (p. 214)
Additional heater* (p. 215)
Parking climate* (p. 206)
6
Applies to fuel-driven heater.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
214
Parking heater*
The parking heater helps the passenger com-
partment reach the correct temperature before
driving.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically when
extra heat is required if the parking climate con-
trol's preconditioning* is activated.
It is then switched off automatically when the
right temperature, the time of a set timer or the
heater's maximum running time has been
reached.
The heater's maximum running time is
40 minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the heater needs to be used.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined
with short journeys may discharge the battery
and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then
the car should be driven for the same amount
of time that the heater is used in order to
ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
the same amount of energy as consumed by
the parking heater. The parking heater is used
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
shop should be contacted for repair.
Related information
Heater* (p. 213)
Additional heater* (p. 215)
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
215
Additional heater*
The additional heater helps the passenger com-
partment and engine reach the correct tempera-
ture while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven.
It then switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the heater needs to be used.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
for the additional heater
It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
vated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Additional Heater to activate/deac-
tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
Related information
Heater* (p. 213)
Parking heater* (p. 214)
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
218
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment's inte-
rior and storage locations.
Front seat
Storage compartment in the door panel and by the
steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors.
Storage spaces with cup holder, ashtray*, electrical
socket and cigarette lighter*, mesh pocket*, as well as
an AUX/USB socket in the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment and ashtray* in the door panel,
cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket*
on the front seat backrest and also electrical sockets
and cigarette lighter* in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
Related information
Tunnel console (p. 219)
Using the glovebox (p. 225)
Sun visors (p. 226)
Electrical sockets (p. 220)
Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
219
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
Storage compartment with cup holder for
driver and passenger as well as 12 V socket.
If ashtray and cigarette lighter were specified
then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V
socket and a detachable ashtray in the cup
holder.
Storage compartment and AUX/USB input
under the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)
Electrical sockets (p. 220)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 224)
Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
(p. 452)
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 188)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
220
Electrical sockets
In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri-
cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in
the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical
socket*.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec-
trical system must be set in the lowest ignition
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with blocked lock position temporarily
deactivated, then the sockets continue to be
active for a further ten minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of
discharging the starter battery, which can limit
functionality.
230 V electrical socket*
230 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The socket can be used for various accessories
requiring a 230 V supply, e.g. chargers and lap-
top computers.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
Using the socket
1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
> The diode on the socket indicates its sta-
tus.
2. Check that the diode is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current avail-
able at the socket.
3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
plug - do not pull on the cable.
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the
socket or come loose when driving.
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example.
Position the accessory so that it is not at
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision.
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn
passengers or the interior.
WARNING
Only use accessories that are undam-
aged and fault-free. The accessories
must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The
accessories must have a CE marking, UL
marking or an equivalent safety marking.
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
221
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Status indication
A diode on the socket indicates its status:
Status indication Reason Action
Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart-
ment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or contin-
uously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
222
Status indication Reason Action
Diode not illuminated The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
The sockets can be used for various accessories
designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler
boxes and mobile phones.
The socket in the tunnel console can be comple-
mented with a cigarette lighter*.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W per socket.
LOADING AND STORAGE
223
Using the sockets
1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug
in the accessory.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not being used or if the socket is left unat-
tended.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
224
Using the cigarette lighter*
The cigarette lighter can be mounted in the 12 V
sockets in the front and rear sections of the tun-
nel console.
Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, front seat.
Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, rear seat.
1. Press in the button on the lighter.
> When the lighter is glowing the button
hops up.
2. Pull out the lighter from the socket and light
a cigarette on the glowing coils.
3. Replace the lighter in the socket.
IMPORTANT
Observe caution when the lighter is activated
so that the glowing part does not damage the
interior for example.
Related information
Tunnel console (p. 219)
Electrical sockets (p. 220)
Emptying ashtrays* (p. 224)
Emptying ashtrays*
With a cigarette lighter in the car, there are
detachable ashtrays in the tunnel console's cup
holders and in the door panels for the rear seat.
Emptying an ashtray in the tunnel
console
1. Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up
from the cup holder and empty the contents.
2. Refit the ashtray in the cup holder.
Emptying an ashtray in the door panels
for the rear seat
1. Open the ashtray's cover and then press the
cover up to a fully vertical position.
> The catch that holds the ashtray in place
is released.
2. Lift up the ashtray and empty the contents.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
225
3. Refit the ashtray and allow it to slide down in
the tracks on the sides.
4. Carefully press the two short sides of the
ashtray.
> The catch that holds the ashtray in place
reattaches.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)
Tunnel console (p. 219)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 224)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a
pen holder on the inside of the lid.
Locking/unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
The key's designated storage space
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
226
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli-
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
Cooling activated
Cooling deactivated
Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving
the control to the end position toward the
passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)
Using private locking (p. 249)
Sun visors
The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir-
ror with card holder.
Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder.
The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto-
matically when the lid is lifted.
The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for
e.g. cards or tickets.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 218)
Cargo area
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use
load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure
the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to con-
ceal the load if desired. The warning triangle and
first-aid kit are also stored in the cargo area.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 229)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 130)
Loading (p. 227)
Tool kit (p. 504)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
227
Loading
There are a number of things to remember when
loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
responding weight.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
Recommendations for loading in the
cargo area
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
ered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h
(30 mph) carry the impact of an item weigh-
ing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable cur-
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of the
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
Recommendations for roof loads
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
1
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
1
Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
228
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
Read about maximum permitted roof load in
the section on Weights.
Related information
Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)
Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 229)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 130)
Safety grille* (p. 233)
Safety net* (p. 232)
Cargo cover* (p. 230)
Weights (p. 564)
Load retaining eyelets
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
Loading (p. 227)
Bag hooks (p. 228)
Safety grille* (p. 233)
Safety net* (p. 232)
Cargo cover* (p. 230)
Bag hooks
Bag hooks, together with an elastic strap, hold
bags in place and prevent them from falling over
and spreading their contents across the cargo
area.
Under the floor hatch*
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
229
There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap
2
in
the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the
cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four differ-
ent positions.
Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks.
Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the
enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles
and are a suitable height - hang them in the
hooks.
Along the sides
There are two bag hooks in the side panel on
each side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
mum of 5 kg.
Related information
Loading (p. 227)
Safety grille* (p. 233)
Safety net* (p. 232)
Cargo cover* (p. 230)
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and
fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking* function is used then the
hatch must be closed.
Related information
Using private locking (p. 249)
Loading (p. 227)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)
2
It is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo dealer.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
230
Cargo cover*
In the extended position, the cargo cover pre-
vents visual access to the cargo area.
Installation
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in
the recess in the side panel in the cargo
area.
Then insert the other end piece in the recess
in the side panel on the opposite side.
Press down the end pieces on both sides -
one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
ing on each end piece has disappeared,
the cargo cover is attached - check that it
is affixed securely.
4. Fold the cargo cover's front sealing disc for-
ward to eliminate the space between the
cargo cover and the rear seat's backrests.
If the safety net* shall be used at the same time
as the cargo cover then the safety net must be
fitted first.
Usage
There are two extended positions for the cargo
cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
ier to reach further into the cargo area.
Full-cover position
1. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
so that it slides over the side panels in the
cargo area. Pull to the end position.
2. Guide the cover's attachment pins into the
grooves in the side panels. Release, while at
the same time angling the handle slightly
upwards so that the attachment pins hook in.
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover
position.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
231
Loading mode
From the full-cover position:
Grip the handle to release the attachment
pins from the hooks.
> The cover retracts until it stops in the
loading position.
Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-
tion:
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins hook into the hooks.
> The cover is then locked in the loading
position.
With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will be
retracted from full-cover position to loading posi-
tion every time the tailgate is opened, and
extended again when the tailgate is closed. The
cargo cover detects if something is obstructing
its movement and then retracts automatically.
NOTE
The cargo cover may not operate automati-
cally in low passenger compartment tempera-
tures.
IMPORTANT
Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover.
IMPORTANT
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening and closing with the automatic*
cargo cover.
IMPORTANT
If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load
then the automatic* cargo cover is moved to
retracted position in order to avoid it making
contact with the load.
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position:
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins
and then release.
From loading position:
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then
release.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position.
Remember that a retracted cargo cover may
obstruct rearward visibility.
Removal
In retracted position:
1. Depress the button on one of the retracted
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
end.
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically
and the cover can be lifted out of the
cargo area.
Related information
Loading (p. 227)
Safety grille* (p. 233)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
232
Safety net* (p. 232)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)
Safety net*
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always
be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
Installation
Rear fitting
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrests for-
ward in order to facilitate installation.
2. Lower the safety net cassette's end pieces
over the mounting eyelets in the recess of
the side panels. Press down the end piece
one side at a time. Check that the cassette is
properly secured.
3. Pull up the net.
4. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the rear roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
5. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it for-
ward to the end position.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
233
Front fitting
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails in
front of the backrest's attachment lugs.
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs.
4. Pull up the net.
5. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the front roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
6. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it for-
ward to the end position.
Removing and storing
1. Undo the safety net from the roof mountings
by pressing the retaining hooks backwards.
Allow the net to roll into the cassette.
2.
Rear fitting:
Press the button on each side of the cas-
sette in order to release the end pieces from
the mounting eyelets. Lift out the safety net.
Front fitting:
Slide the cassette from the attachment lugs
and lift out the safety net.
Related information
Loading (p. 227)
Safety grille* (p. 233)
Cargo cover* (p. 230)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)
Safety grille*
The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment.
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
Volvo's strength requirements.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be attached and anchored correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
234
Installation
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that
replacing roof mountings is performed at an
authorised Volvo workshop or dealer.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
through one of the rear side doors.
3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people hold
the safety grille in the right position.
4. Fit the enclosed screw and screw in. Repeat
on the other side.
> Check that the safety grille is firmly fitted.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
tion instructions
3
that were included with the ini-
tial purchase.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Related information
Loading (p. 227)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 228)
Safety net* (p. 232)
Cargo cover* (p. 230)
3
Installation instructions no. 31659257.
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
236
Remote control key
The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors
and tailgate. The remote control key needs to be
inside the car for it to be started.
Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
Tag), on right.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with sup-
port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand-
ard. The key needs to be located in the front of
the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver’s
pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console,
to be able to start the car. See the section "Star-
ting the engine".
As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors
and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The
key then has a range extending in a semicircle
with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres out from the
driver's door and approx. 1 metre out from the
tailgate. See the section "Remote control key
range".
With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock-
ing, the remote control key can be located any-
where in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start
the car.
Each of the remote control keys that are supplied
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
specific profile is used, the car's settings are
adjusted to match the settings for that profile.
See the section "Driver profiles".
Button-less key (Key Tag)
For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlock-
ing*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key
(Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as
the normal remote control key when it comes to
keyless starting and locking/unlocking. It has no
detachable key blade and the battery cannot be
replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Ordering additional keys
The car is supplied with two remote control keys
- one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped
with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys
can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be
programmed and used for one single car. If addi-
tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles
are added - one per new remote control key. This
also applies for the key tag.
In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss
of a remote control key" below.
Remote control key buttons
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors and the tailgate and also arms the
alarm*. Press and hold to close all of the win-
dows and the panorama roof* simultane-
ously. See the section "Locking/unlocking
from the outside" and "Locking/unlocking
from the inside".
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
alarm. A longer press opens all the windows
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
237
simultaneously, also called Global opening
1
.
See the section "Locking/unlocking from the
outside".
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper-
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto-
matically when the button is held depressed.
The tailgate is also closed with a long press -
acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec-
tion "Power operated tailgate".
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the button
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
and the horn. The function can be turned off
with the same button once it has been active
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func-
tion switches off automatically after
3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and sunroof are de-energised
by always taking the remote control key with
you when you leave the car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting
and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted
by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers -
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm.
If there is still interference - use the remote con-
trol key's key blade and then place the key in the
backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the
car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade".
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
remote control keys must be taken to the work-
shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked in the centre display's top view.
Related information
Remote control key range (p. 238)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 257)
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
Driver profiles (p. 174)
1
Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
238
Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Red Key - Restricted remote control key*
(p. 239)
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work prop-
erly it needs to be within a certain distance from
the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock-
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
or have a range that extends approx.
20 metres from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
For keyless use
2
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered
by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but-
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
cle format area with a radius of approx.
1.5 metres on both long sides and approx.
1 metre from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key
blade.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message
Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
tem (p. 240)
2
Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
239
Red Key - Restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for
certain car properties. The restrictions are
intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g.
when it is loaned out.
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys-
tems will always be active. Other functions of the
key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric-
tions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote con-
trol key.
The settings for Red Key are made by the user of
the normal remote control key from the centre
display's top view; go to:
Settings System
Driver Profiles Red Keys
Some of the car's driver support functions cannot
be deactivated by the user of a Red Key.
The restrictions are intended to act as measures
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings
cannot be changed by the person using a Red
Key.
Possible settings
The following settings can be made to apply for a
Red Key:
Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)
3
(On/Off):
Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
Speed reminder
3
(On/Off):
Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Muted max. volume
3
(On/Off):
Setting at first use: On
Adaptive cruise control*:
Setting at first use: Longest intervals
See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for
more information
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section
"Blind Spot Information"
Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec-
tion "Lane assistance"
Distance warning* - see section "Distance
warning"
City Safety - see section "City Safety"
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section
"Driver Alert Control"
Road Sign Information* - see section "Road
Sign Information".
3
Option, only available with Red Key.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
City Safety (p. 330)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock
system
4
and therefore has a number of built-in
antennas positioned at different locations in the
car.
Antenna locations.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door
5
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door
5
In the cargo area
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys-
tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is
to prevent interference between the pace-
maker and the keyless system.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
4
The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
5
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
241
Locking/unlocking from the outside
The car is locked/unlocked from the outside
using buttons on the remote control key or with
the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip-
ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive
Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power
operation* and/or foot movement*.
Locking/unlocking
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate
simultaneously.
Locking
The driver's door must be closed in order for the
lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not
locked and their alarms armed* until they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Unlocking
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
control key, the battery may be discharged - in
which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with
the detachable key blade. See the section
"Detachable key blade" for more information.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
Settings for remote-controlled unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for
unlocking.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
.
3. Select option:
Unlock All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
the doors requires two presses on the
remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect central unlocking via
opening handles from the inside. For more infor-
mation about how unlocking from the inside is
affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking
from the inside".
Keyless locking/unlocking*
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/
unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
making it more convenient to open the car if your
hands are full. For information on the system's
range, see the section "Remote control key
range".
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
Touch-sensitive surfaces
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tail-
gate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that
is only used for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the
handle while touching the lock surface risks
giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Rubberised pressure plate on the boot lid used for
unlocking only.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
open when locking the car with a side door han-
dle.
Touch the marked surface towards the rear
on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock but-
ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before
closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panorama roof*
simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-
sensitive recess on the outside of the door han-
dle until all side windows and the panorama roof*
are closed.
Keyless entry
Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin-
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked -
open the doors or tailgate as usual.
Settings for Keyless entry
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on
My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock
3. Select option:
All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Unlocking with Volvo On Call
It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the
Volvo On Call* app.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
243
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)
Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 256)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Alarm* (p. 262)
Indication on locking/unlocking the
car
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators con-
firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per-
formed.
It is possible to separately adapt the indication for
locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how
the car confirms locking and unlocking".
Exterior indication
Locking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors
6
.
Unlocking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors
6
.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked.
If locking is performed with only the driver's door
closed
7
, the car will be locked but indication will
only occur after all doors, tailgate and bonnet
have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator
The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
show the status of the alarm system.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
sating flashes.
6
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
7
Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
244
Indication in lock buttons
Front doors
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
of either front door indicates that all doors are
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
guish in both doors.
In all doors*
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Select how the car confirms locking
and unlocking
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking
can be set via the centre display.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Locking Visible
Locking Feedback
.
3. Select setting for audible and visible
response.
Read more about indication of locking/unlocking
in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the
door mirrors".
Related information
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
Approach light duration (p. 148)
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 153)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
245
Locking/unlocking from the inside
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
Central locking
Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Press the button to lock and the but-
ton to unlock.
Unlocking
Press the button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
A long press on the
button opens all the side
windows simultaneously - also called global
opening
8
.
Alternative unlocking method
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front
door.
Pull the opening handle on one of the front
doors and release.
>
If the
Unlock All Doors option is
selected for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function for the remote control
key, all doors will be unlocked. If the
Single Door option is selected, only the
individual front door will be unlocked and
opened.
For more information about
Remote and
Interior Unlock, see the section "Locking/
unlocking from the outside".
Locking
Press the button - both front doors must
be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
A long press on the
button closes all side
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Lock button* rear doors
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
tive rear door.
To unlock the rear door:
Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks
and opens.
8
Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
246
Settings for automatic locking
The doors and tailgate can be locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select
Auto Lock Doors While Driving.
Related information
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
Indication on locking/unlocking the car
(p. 243)
Deadlocks*
Deadlocks means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors
being opened from the inside.
Deadlocks are activated with the remote control
key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when deadlocks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm* will be trig-
gered. See the section "Alarm" for switching off
the alarm.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Switching off deadlocks temporarily
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
deadlocks can be temporarily switched off with
the
Reduced guard function.
Tap on the Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
function view.
Reducing the alarm level can also be selected via
the centre display's top view.
Tap on Settings My Car Locking and
select
Reduced Guard.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
tre display and deadlocks are temporarily deacti-
vated in the subsequent locking of the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are
temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a
maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
deadlocks must be temporarily deactivated again.
Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detec-
tors* are switched off at the same time.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
247
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 241)
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 245)
Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 251)
Alarm* (p. 262)
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and
opened in different ways depending on the
equipment level of the car.
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail-
gate unlocked by using the remote control key's
button.
There are two different ways to unlock the tail-
gate
1.
Press the remote control key's
button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel extinguishes in order to show
that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed.
2.
With the power operated tailgate* option
Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
remote control key's
button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
alarm functions armed.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
248
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
You simply need to have the remote control key
in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.
1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail-
gate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
berised panel.
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside
of the car
To unlock the tailgate:
1.
Brief press on the
button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2.
Plus with the power operated tailgate option
Long press on the
button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
Locking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key's button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel starts to flash - the car is
locked and the alarm* is armed.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
249
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)
Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 256)
Using private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private lock-
ing function when the car is taken in for service,
left at a hotel or similar.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be
activated.
Function button for private
locking. Depending on the cur-
rent status of the lock,
Private
locking unlocked or Private
locking locked is shown.
Enter the security code before using for
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
first time the function is used. It can then be used
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
1. The security code can be activated from the
function view or the top view in the centre
display.
Tap on the
Private Locking button in the
function view.
Or:
Tap on
Settings in the top view. Tap on
My Car Locking and select Private
Locking.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the desired security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready to be acti-
vated.
If the system has been reset then the above pro-
cedure needs to be repeated.
Activate private locking
1. The function can be activated from the func-
tion view or the top view in the centre display.
Tap on the
Private Locking button in the
function view.
Or:
Tap on
Settings in the top view. Tap on
My Car Locking and select Private
Locking.
> A pop-up window is shown.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Locking is con-
firmed by a green indication at the button
in the function view and the private lock-
ing box being ticked in the settings view.
Deactivate private locking
1. The function can be deactivated from the
function view or the top view in the centre
display.
Tap on the
Private Locking button in the
function view.
Or:
Tap on
Settings in the top view. Tap on
My Car Locking and select Private
Locking.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Unlocking is con-
firmed by the green indication at the but-
ton in the function view disappearing and
the tick disappearing from the private
locking box in the settings view.
NOTE
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
than three times, the security code can be
used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE
Is private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
Related information
Using the glovebox (p. 225)
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the left-hand
9
front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key.
all doors are emergency locked - see the
section "Locking/unlocking with detachable
key blade".
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated/deactivated - see the sec-
tion "Child safety locks".
The button-less key
10
(Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
9
This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
10
Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
251
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Return the key blade to its intended position
in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
Related information
Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 251)
Child safety locks (p. 261)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade
can be used to unlock the car from the outside -
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has
become discharged.
Unlocking
Pull out the front door handle on the left-
hand side
11
to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
der and release the handle so that the rear
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
11
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
252
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
clockwise in step (3).
Switching off the alarm*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the
tunnel console.
2.
Then turn the start knob to START and
release it.
> The control automatically returns to its
starting position - the alarm signal stops
and the alarm switches off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the
child safety locks.
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key or with the cen-
tral locking button on the driver's door.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
253
NOTE
A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
A manually locked rear door with acti-
vated manual or electric child safety locks
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking but-
ton.
Related information
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Power operated tailgate*
The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri-
cally.
Opening/closing via a foot movement is also
available as an extended option - see the section
"Opening/closing the power operated tailgate
with foot movement" for more information.
Opening
The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with
foot movement*, a button on the instrument
panel or the remote control key.
Opening/closing button on the instrument panel.
Choose one of the following options to open the
tailgate:
Light press on the tailgate handle.
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
Closing
The tailgate can be closed via the instrument
panel's button, with foot movement*, with the
remote control key or the buttons
12
along the
bottom edge of the tailgate.
Choose one of the following options to close the
tailgate.
Long press on the instrument panel's
button or the remote control key's but-
ton.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
12
A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
254
Button for closing and locking on the underside of the
tailgate.
Press the button
12
on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate remains unlocked.
NOTE
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch
has been left open. Thereafter, it must be
closed manually.
Press the button
12
on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
NOTE
When using key-free* blocking/closing, three
signals will sound if the key is not detected
sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec-
tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and
remote keys" for more information.
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.
Cancel opening/closing
There are five ways to cancel opening/clos-
ing:
Press the button on the instrument panel.
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the close button
12
along the bottom
edge of the tailgate.
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
Using the foot movement* (see section
"Opening/closing power operated tailgate
with foot movement" for more informa-
tion).
> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and
the tailgate will stop and can then be
manoeuvred manually.
Programmable max. opening
The maximum opening position of the tailgate
can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in
a garage.
To adjust max. opening:
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi-
tion.
12
A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
255
2.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
cate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the
button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its max.
position when opened.
NOTE
If the system has been operating continu-
ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 2 minutes.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch
protection is activated.
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
and the tailgate returns to the programmed
max. position.
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Pre-tensioned springs
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
gate.
WARNING
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten-
sioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
Related information
Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 256)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
256
Opening/closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened/
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the
bumper
13
.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range
14
behind the car in order for open-
ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an
already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental
opening e.g. in a car wash.
Operation
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
Opening/closing
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions:
Opening and closing with foot movement
Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and clos-
ing with foot movement requires the "Power
operated tailgate"* option.
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening/closing is activated - the tailgate
is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is on open position then it is
always closed on activation via foot move-
ment.
The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument
panel's button, the remote control key or the but-
ton(s)
15
under the tailgate. For more information,
see the section "Power operated tailgate".
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
vation to fail.
Cancel opening/closing
Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening/closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.
13
If the car is equipped with skid plate/diffuser* then the detector is positioned out towards the left-hand corner of the bumper.
14
See the section "Remote control key range" for more information.
15
Only applies to a car equipped with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry)*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
257
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
Related information
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 247)
Power operated tailgate* (p. 253)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
The battery in the remote control key needs to
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var-
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key
is used.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message
Car key battery low
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
from the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
The battery in the button-less key
16
(Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must be deleted from the car since it is still
possible to use it to start the car via back-up
start.
16
This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
258
Opening and changing
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Move the button to the side and slide the
back shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat-
tery cover anticlockwise until the markings
meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press-
ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
259
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat-
tery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press
it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
properly positioned and securely attached.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
260
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until
a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol Message Specification
Car key not
found
See
Owner's
manual
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting -
place the key in the
cup holder near the
key symbol and try
again.
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system
17
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system:
Symbol Message Specification
Remotely
immobilised
Car not pos-
sible to start
The remote-con-
trolled immobiliser
with tracking sys-
tem is activated.
The car cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Centre.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
Remote control key range (p. 238)
17
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
261
Child safety locks
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
There is an electric* and a manual lock.
Electric activation/deactivation*
The electric child safety locks can be activated/
deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0.
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided
that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition
position" for more information.
Button for electric activation/deactivation.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi-
tion higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the but-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Symbol Message Specification
Rear child
lock Acti-
vated
Child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lock Deacti-
vated
Child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Manual activation/deactivation
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
ual door locks.
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob. For more information,
see the section "Detachable key blade".
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
262
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Related information
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Alarm*
The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in
the car.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
18
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
the starter battery's cable is disconnected or
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message
Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
ance.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
the car is left with a window or the panoramic
roof* open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic
roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
grated parking heater (or a portable electric
heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
upwards into the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used
- see the section further down in this article.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
press the remote control key's lock button
touch in the marked area on the outside of
the door handle
19
or
push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate
19
.
If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail-
gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate
can also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.
18
Applies to certain markets.
19
Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
263
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:
press the remote control key's unlock button
grip one of the door handles
19
or
push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate
19
.
Switching off a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key's unlock button
or set the car in ignition position I by turning
the ignition dial to START and then releas-
ing.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following
happens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times
20
.
Lock and alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second –
alarm is armed.
After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
flashes rapidly for up to 30 seconds or until
ignition position I has been selected by turn-
ing the ignition dial to START and releasing
it - the alarm has been triggered.
Reduced alarm level
Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is
the same as with the temporary disengaging of
the deadlocks function.
Press the Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to switch
off the movement and tilt
detectors temporarily.
For more information, see the section "Dead-
locks".
Related information
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 264)
Disarming the alarm* without working remote
control key (p. 264)
Deadlocks* (p. 246)
19
Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)
20
Applies to certain markets.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
264
Automatic arming/rearming of the
alarm*
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintention-
ally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto-
matically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 262)
Disarming the alarm* without working remote
control key (p. 264)
Disarming the alarm* without
working remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the
remote control key's battery is dead.
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3.
Turn the ignition dial to START and release.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 262)
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 264)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Starting the car (p. 386)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
265
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the remote control key system
can be read in the table.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval number, see the table
below.
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
266
Country/Area Type approval
Brazil MT-3245/2015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
For more information about type approval for the
remote control key system, see
support.volvocars.com.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
267
Remote control key
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo
la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
268
Country/Area Type approval
Serbia
The United Arab Emi-
rates
Key Tag
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
269
Country/Area Type approval
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo
la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
270
Country/Area Type approval
Serbia
The United Arab Emi-
rates
Related information
Remote control key (p. 236)
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
272
Speed-dependent steering force
Speed related power steering causes the steer-
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv-
ity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires only a slight effort.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be per-
ceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message.
Change the steering force level*
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre dis-
play's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering force
Selection of steering force is not accessible while
turning is in progress.
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Roll Stability Control
Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stabiliser sys-
tem that minimises the risk of overturning, for
example during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if
the car skids.
The RSC system registers if and how much the
car's lateral inclination changes. This information
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
tem improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
for safe driving.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 273)
Safety (p. 56)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
273
Electronic stability control
Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Control — ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid-
ding and improves the car’s traction.
The activation of the ESC sys-
tem during braking may be
noticed as a throbbing sound.
The car may accelerate slower
than expected when the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
The stability system ESC is supplementary
assistance - it cannot handle all situations in
all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that the
vehicle is driven safely and that applicable
road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
The ESC system consists of the following func-
tions:
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
Traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceler-
ation.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not.
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (Engine Drag Control —
EDC) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g.
after shifting down or engine braking when driv-
ing in low gear on slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*
1
The function of trailer stability assist (Trailer
Stability Assist - TSA) is to stabilise a car with
attached trailer in situations where snaking
occurs. For more information, see the “Driving
with a trailer” section.
NOTE
The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode
is activated.
Related information
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 274)
Symbols and messages for electronic stabil-
ity control (p. 275)
Roll Stability Control (p. 272)
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
1
Trailer stability assist is included when installing the Volvo genuine towbar.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
274
Sport mode for electronic stability
control
Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Control — ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid-
ding and improves the car’s traction.
The ESC system is always activated — it cannot
be switched off. However, the driver can select
Sport mode, which allows for a more active driv-
ing experience.
In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than in normal
driving and then allows a certain degree of con-
trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC
intervenes and stabilises the car.
For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid
by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys-
tem intervenes and stabilises the car.
Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the
car has become bogged down or is driving on a
loose surface, such as sand or deep snow.
Select/deselect Sport mode
The Sport mode is activated/
deactivated in the centre dis-
play's function view.
Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated, a
green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
The driver display indicates Sport mode
by displaying this symbol with a con-
stant glow until the function is deacti-
vated or the engine is switched off. The
next time the engine is started, the ESC system
is back in its normal mode again.
Limitations for Sport mode
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the functions from speed
limiter, cruise control or adaptive cruise control is
activated.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 273)
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Cruise control (p. 284)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
275
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis-
play.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC
Service required
ESC system disengaged.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
276
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 273)
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 274)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
277
Speed limiter*
A speed limiter (Speed Limiter — SL) can be
regarded as a reverse cruise control — the
driver regulates the speed using the accelerator
pedal but is prevented by the speed limiter from
accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/preset
maximum speed.
Overview
Buttons and symbols for functions
2
.
Increase the stored maximum speed or reac-
tivate the speed limiter and resume the
stored maximum speed
Activate the speed limiter and store the cur-
rent speed, or deactivate the speed limiter
Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
WARNING
The Speed Limiter is an aid and cannot deal
with all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver must always pay attention to traffic
conditions and take action when the Speed
Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed.
The driver always has the ultimate responsibil-
ity for the car being driven safely and in
accordance with applicable traffic rules and
regulations, even when the Speed Limiter
function is in use.
Limitations
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
case, the driver is alerted by the message
Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
Activating and starting the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter
(p. 279)
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)
2
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
278
Activating and starting the speed
limiter
The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter - SL)
must first be selected and activated in order to
be able to regulate the speed.
Activate the speed limiter
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the speed lim-
iter can then be activated.
Start the speed limiter
The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is
30 km/h (20 mph).
With the symbol/function displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The speed limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter
(p. 279)
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)
Managing speed for the speed
limiter
The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be
set to different speeds.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the stored maximum speed with
short or long presses on the steering wheel
button
(1) or - (3):
Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph) with each press.
Hold the button depressed to adjust
+/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release
when the driver display's marking (4)/(6)
is at the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last press is
stored in the memory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
279
Related information
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Activating and starting the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter
(p. 279)
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)
Deactivating/reactivating the speed
limiter
The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can be reactivated later.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Deactivate the speed limiter and set it
in standby mode
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
Reactivating the speed limiter from
standby mode
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The driver display's speed limit markings
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
car's speed is then limited again by the
last stored maximum speed.
or
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limiter indicators and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
its current speed as the maximum speed.
Temporary increase in speed with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be temporarily overrid-
den with the accelerator pedal without the speed
limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able
to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In
which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it so that acceleration is interrupted
when the desired speed has been reached.
> In this case, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
280
Related information
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Activating and starting the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 280)
Switching off the speed limiter
The speed limiter Speed Limiter — SL can be
deactivated.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
which deletes the set/stored maximum
speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
Related information
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Activating and starting the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 278)
Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter
(p. 279)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
281
Automatic speed limiter*
The automatic speed limiter (Automatic Speed
Limiter - ASL) function helps the driver to adapt
the car's maximum speed to the speed shown
on the road signs.
The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter — SL)
can be changed to automatic speed limiter.
The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa-
tion from the Road Sign Information
3
function to
automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
WARNING
The automatic speed limiter function is an aid,
and does not work in all driving situations,
traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver
always bears responsibility for maintaining the
correct distance and speed, as well as when
the automatic speed limiter is being used.
Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-rela-
ted road sign, the speed from the Road sign
information function many be incorrect - in
such cases the driver must intervene him/
herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable
speed.
See also the heading "Limitations for Road
sign information".
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which speed
limiter function is active:
Symbol SL ASL
A
Sign symbol
B
after "70" = ASL is acti-
vated.
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
B
See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
the speedometer) can be shown in
three colours with the following mean-
ings:
Colour of sign
symbol
Meaning
Greenish yellow ASL is active
Grey ASL has been set in
standby mode
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary
standby mode
A
A
For example, scanning of a sign failed.
Limitations of ASL
Automatic speed limitation takes place using
speed information from the RSI
3
function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If RSI
3
cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI
3
func-
tion can once again interpret and provide speed
information to the ASL.
See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign
Information".
3
Road Sign Information – RSI
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
282
Related information
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 282)
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter (p. 283)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 352)
Activating/deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (Automatic
Speed Limiter - ASL) can be activated and
deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter
(Speed Limiter - SL).
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Activating the automatic speed limiter
1.
Tap on the
Speed Sign Assist button in
function view.
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi-
cator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
2.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
Deactivating the automatic speed
limiter
Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
function view.
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi-
cation becomes GREY - SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only
the maximum speed stored in memory.
Related information
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter (p. 283)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
283
Changing the tolerance for the
Automatic speed limiter
The speed limiter function (Automatic Speed
Limiter - ASL) can be set for different tolerance
levels.
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
signed speed limit of 70 km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Buttons and symbols for functions.
Press the steering wheel button (1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected tol-
erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed -
then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is
deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
be shown with a RED indicator on the
speedometer.
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 281)
Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 282)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 278)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
284
Cruise control
The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview
Buttons and symbols for functions.
Increase the stored speed or reactivate the
Cruise control and resume the stored speed
Activate the Cruise control and store the cur-
rent speed, or deactivate the Cruise control
Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control
option, the driver can change between CC and
ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control".
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 284)
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 285)
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 286)
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 301)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Activating and starting the Cruise
control
Cruise control function (Cruise Control - CC)
must first be selected and activated in order to
be able to regulate the speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Active Cruise Control
Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise con-
trol can then be activated.
Start Cruise Control
In order to start the Cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must be
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
285
With the symbol/function displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Related information
Cruise control (p. 284)
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 285)
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 286)
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)
Managing speed for the Cruise
control
The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be
set to different speeds.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the stored speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
- (3):
Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph) with each press.
Hold the button depressed to adjust
+/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release
when the driver display's marking (4)/(6)
is at the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler-
ation by engine braking. In this case the driver
can temporarily disable foot brake application by
Cruise Control.
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
matic foot braking and then uses engine
braking only.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 284)
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 284)
DRIVER SUPPORT
286
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 286)
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise
control
The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can be reactivated later.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in
standby mode
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY — Cruise Control is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
temporarily exceed the set speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the gear selector is moved to N position
the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
than 1 minute
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
287
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
or
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by pressing steer-
ing wheel button
.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 284)
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 284)
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 285)
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 287)
Deactivating Cruise Control
Cruise control Cruise Control — CC can be
deactivated.
Buttons and symbols for functions.
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for Cruise control (4) are switched off -
which deletes the set/stored speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* it is
possible to change between both cruise control
functions - see the heading "Change between
CC and ACC".
Related information
Cruise control (p. 284)
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 284)
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 285)
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 286)
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 301)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
288
Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert)
warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle
ahead becomes too short.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No
distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not
affected.
Head-up display*
Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen
4
.
In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol
is shown on the windscreen for as long as the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value. However, this presupposes that
the
Show Driver Support function is activated
via settings in the car's menu system; see the
heading "Head-up display" for how this works.
NOTE
Information on the windscreen may be diffi-
cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear-
ing sunglasses.
Related information
Activating and setting the time interval for
Distance warning* (p. 289)
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
4
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
289
Activating and setting the time
interval for Distance warning*
The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function
can be activated/deactivated and a time interval
can be set.
Activating/deactivating Distance
warning
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Tap on the Distance Alert button in func-
tion view.
> Distance warning is activated/deactivated,
a green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
Setting the time interval for Distance
warning
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when the adap-
tive cruise control function is activated.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
ted distance in metres for a given time inter-
val.
The set time interval is also used by the
Adaptive Cruise Control function.
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
290
Limitations of Distance Warning*
The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function
may have limitations in certain situations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun-
glasses, could mean that the warning light in
the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar unit's capacity to detect vehicles in
front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates
at a shorter distance than the setting or that
the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the "Limita-
tions for radar unit" section.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Activating and setting the time interval for
Distance warning* (p. 289)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Adaptive cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control - ACC) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed combined with a pre-selected time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax-
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor-
ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead
5
.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road
5
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
291
is clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
WARNING
The Adaptive cruise control is an aid, which
cannot handle all traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and
intervene if the Adaptive cruise control does
not maintain a suitable speed or suitable time
interval.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before the function is
used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct time interval and
speed - even when the Adaptive cruise con-
trol is being used.
Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies in case of large speed differ-
ences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly.
Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
The Adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid-
ance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low
trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles
and objects.
Do not use the Adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery
surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the
road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com-
ponents must only be performed at a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
292
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
5
.
Increases stored speed or reactivates the
adaptive cruise control and resumes stored
speed and time interval
Activate the adaptive cruise control and store
the current speed or deactivate the adaptive
cruise control
Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control
option, the driver can change between CC and
ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control".
Driver display
Indication of speeds
5
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise
control".
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
5
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
5
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
293
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected -
hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a
warning without braking when so required.
Head-up display*
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
5
.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol.
NOTE
Information on the windscreen may be diffi-
cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear-
ing sunglasses.
Related information
Activating and starting the adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 299)
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 301)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise
control* (p. 297)
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 300)
Symbols and messages for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 302)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
5
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
294
Activating and starting the adaptive
cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control - ACC) must first be activated and then
started if it is to control the speed and distance.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Activate Adaptive Cruise Control
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap-
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode.
Press (2) or (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function
(4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
Start Adaptive Cruise Control
In order to start the ACC the following require-
ments apply:
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
With the symbol/function displayed -
press the steering wheel button
(1).
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
figures in the centre of the speedometer.
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance
symbol shows two vehicles.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
295
Managing the speed of the adaptive
cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control -ACC) can be set to different speeds.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the stored speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
- (3):
Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph) with each press.
Hold the button depressed to adjust
+/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release
when the driver display's marking (4) is at
the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for the Adaptive
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi-
mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
296
Setting the time interval for the
adaptive cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control -ACC) can be set to different time inter-
vals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when the Dis-
tance Warning function is activated.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehi-
cle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter-
val to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con-
trol increases the time interval slightly.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen problem should arise.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
If the adaptive cruise control does not appear
to react when activated, this may be because
the time distance to the vehicle in front is pre-
venting an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
ted distance in metres for a given time inter-
val.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
297
Deactivating/activating the adaptive
cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control - ACC) can be temporarily deactivated
so that it is set in the standby mode and can
later be reactivated.
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and
set it in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
>
The
symbol on the driver display
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
the stored speed in the centre of the
speedometer changes from BEIGE to
GREY.
In standby mode, the driver must him/herself
control both speed and distance.
When the adaptive cruise control is in standby
mode and the car drives too close to a vehicle
ahead, the driver is warned about the short dis-
tance by the Distance Warning function instead
(see reference to the heading "Distance Warn-
ing" at the end of this section).
Standby mode on driver intervention
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti-
vated and set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
In this situation, the driver must intervene and
adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other
systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any
of these systems stops working, adaptive cruise
control is switched off automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will
sound and a message is shown in the driver dis-
play. The driver must then intervene and adapt
the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
Automatic deactivation may occur if:
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off the seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the parking brake is applied
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
298
Reactivating adaptive cruise control
from standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by pressing steer-
ing wheel button
.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Overtaking assistance with the
adaptive cruise control* or
Pilot Assist*
Adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control
- ACC) or Pilot Assist can assist the driver when
overtaking other vehicles.
When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another
vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to
overtake by activating the direction indicator
6
,
adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by
accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead
before the car reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi-
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations other than during overtak-
ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to
indicate a change of lane or exit to another
road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
ing Assistance to be activated:
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
the speed must be at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist
must be high enough for overtaking to take
place safely.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
299
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking assistance is started.
Limitations
When using Overtaking Assistance the driver
should be prepared for sudden changes in condi-
tions. In some conditions Overtaking Assistance
can cause unwanted acceleration.
Some situations should be avoided for this rea-
son. Examples of such situations are:
the car is approaching an exit road in order
to turn off in the same direction that is nor-
mally used for overtaking
the vehicle in front slows before your car has
entered the overtaking lane
traffic in the overtaking lane is slowing
a car designed for right-hand traffic is being
driven in a country with left-hand traffic (or
vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Change of target and automatic
braking with the Adaptive Cruise
Control
In combination with automatic gearbox, the
adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control
- ACC ) has functionality for change of target
and braking at certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov-
ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive
cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is
changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
the stationary vehicle and instead select the
stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehi-
cle or some other object, such as a speed
bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap-
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
6
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
300
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
one of the following ways:
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
ing forward within 6 seconds.
NOTE
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
disengaged.
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes
are released and the car may start to roll - the
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
the parking brake is applied
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
tion
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes
the brakes have overheated
the engine is switched off.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Limitations of the adaptive cruise
control*
The (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) may have
limitations in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control with a
heavy load or with a trailer connected to the car.
Miscellaneous
Drive mode
Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the "Limita-
tions for radar unit" section.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
301
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control*
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the
driver can change between Cruise Control (CC)
and ACC.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise
control is active:
CC
Cruise Control
ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control
A A
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
Changing from ACC to CC
How to change from Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) to Cruise Control (CC):
1. Set adaptive cruise control in standby mode
using the
steering wheel button.
2.
Tap on the
Cruise control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) is now switched
off and Cruise Control (CC) is set in
standby mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
rent speed.
WARNING
The car no longer maintains the preset time
interval after switching from ACC to CC - it
merely follows the set speed.
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
ACC will be activated the next time the engine is
started.
Changing from CC to ACC
Proceed as follows to change from cruise control
(CC) to adaptive cruise control (ACC):
1. Set cruise control in standby mode using the
steering wheel button.
2.
Tap on the
Cruise control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
CC to ACC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the pre-
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
Cruise control (p. 284)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
302
Symbols and messages for the
adaptive cruise control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise
Control - ACC) can be shown via the driver dis-
play and/or the head-up display*.
Here are some examples
7
.
The previous illustration
8
shows that the adaptive
cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and
that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
The previous illustration
8
shows that the adaptive
cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and at
the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is
keeping the same speed.
Symbol Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Unavailable and the symbol is GREY
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
7
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h.
8
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
303
Symbol Message Specification
Adaptive cruise
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's side markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable
driving and a more relaxed driving experience
during, for example, long journeys on motorways
in even traffic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects side markings
9
.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans
the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's
side markings on the road surface using the
camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
maintained with automatic speed adjustment
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and the
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
NOTE
Pilot Assist steering assistance is deactivated
and is resumed without prior warning.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
cates active steering assis-
tance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
cates deactivated steering assistance.
9
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
305
WARNING
Pilot Assist is an aid which cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and
intervene if Pilot Assist does not provide suit-
able steering assistance or maintain a suita-
ble speed or suitable time interval.
Read all the sections about this function in
the owner's manual in order to learn about its
limitations, of which the driver should be
aware before the function is used.
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on the road surface
on each side of the lane. All other use
involves increased risk of contact with sur-
rounding obstacles that are not detected by
the function.
The driver always bears responsibility for how
the car is controlled as well as for maintaining
the correct distance and speed, even when
Pilot Assist is being used.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used to adjust
the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak-
ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This
applies in case of large speed differences or if
the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the
limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the speed set
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver must intervene if the system
does not detect a vehicle in front.
Pilot Assist does not brake for people, ani-
mals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and
motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
Do not use Pilot Assist, for example, in city
traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with
a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads,
on slip roads, or with a trailer connected to
the car.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of Pilot Assist components must
only be performed at a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
306
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
9
.
Increases stored speed or reactivates Pilot
Assist and resumes stored speed and time
interval
Activates/deactivates Pilot Assist
Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise
control
Reduces stored speed
Increases the distance to vehicles ahead
Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot
Assist
Reduces the distance to vehicles ahead
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
Driver display
Indication of speeds
9
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
9
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
9
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
307
WARNING
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
whose camera and radar unit has been
detected - therefore a warning may not occur
or be delayed. Do not wait for a warning with-
out braking when so required.
Head-up display*
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
9
.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol.
NOTE
Information on the windscreen may be diffi-
cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear-
ing sunglasses.
Related information
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
(p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Activating and starting the
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started to be able to control speed and distance
and to give steering assistance.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
9
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
308
With the adaptive cruise control in the standby
mode:
1.
Press (6).
>
The
symbol changes to Pilot Assist
in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is
stored, which is shown with figures in the
centre of the speedometer.
...or...
With the adaptive cruise control started:
Press (6).
> Pilot Assist is started.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering
wheel symbol (2) has changed
from GREY to GREEN.
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver
must have his/her hands on the steering wheel.
The system continually monitors this. If hands are
not detected on the steering wheel then a text
message is shown, prompting the driver to
actively steer the car. If this is not done, an
acoustic warning signal will also be given.
If that does not prompt the driver to put his/her
hands on the steering wheel either, Pilot Assist
changes to standby mode. Following which, Pilot
Assist must be restarted with the steering wheel
button
.
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
(p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
309
Managing the speed for
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the stored speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
- (3):
Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph) with each press.
Hold the button depressed to adjust
+/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release
when the driver display's marking (4) is at
the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
310
Setting the time interval for
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter-
vals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol-
lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions.
For example, at low speed, when the distances
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen problem should arise.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
If Pilot Assist does not appear to react when
activated, this may be because the time dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is preventing an
increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
ted distance in metres for a given time inter-
val.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
311
Deactivating/activating the
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speed-
ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
...or...
Press (3).
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
to the adaptive cruise control in active
mode.
In standby mode, the driver is no longer given any
driver steering recommendations and must con-
trol both speed and distance him/herself.
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car
drives too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is
warned about the short distance by the Distance
Warning function instead (see reference to the
heading "Distance Warning" at the end of this
section).
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in
standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute .
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen-
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering
assistance is automatically reactivated if the
lane's side markings can still be detected.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
312
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g.
stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any of these
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is
switched off automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will
sound and a message is shown in the driver dis-
play. The driver must then intervene and adapt
the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
Automatic deactivation may occur if:
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off the seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the parking brake is applied
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by pressing steer-
ing wheel button
.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
313
Change of target and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist*
In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target and
braking at certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead select the stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar-
get object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching for-
ward in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is
automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
car in front starts moving again then the Pilot
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following
way:
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle
ahead if it starts moving forward within
6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disen-
gaged.
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
314
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver
must therefore intervene and brake the car him-
self/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
the parking brake is applied
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
tion
the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
the brakes have overheated
the engine is switched off.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi-
tion in the lane.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
315
IMPORTANT
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automati-
cally deactivated - in which case, the use of
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of
such situations may be that:
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in
the event of multiple sets of markings.
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view
with poor light conditions, back-lighting,
wet road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane
markings, with a subsequent risk of con-
tact between the car and such obstacles.
The driver must ensure him/herself that
the car is at a suitable distance from such
obstacles.
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
The recommended steering input is force
limited, which means that it cannot
always help the driver to steer and keep
the car within the lane.
The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use
Pilot Assist with a heavy load or with a trailer con-
nected to the car.
Miscellaneous
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the "Limita-
tions for radar unit" section.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
316
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
Here are some examples
10
.
The previous illustration
11
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no
vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration
11
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same
time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the
same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
10
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h.
11
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
317
The previous illustration
11
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same
time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the
same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
The previous illustration
11
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no
vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Related information
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 309)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Overtaking assistance with the adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 298)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
11
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver support
systems and has the task of sensing other vehi-
cles.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
Related information
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Type approval for radar units (p. 323)
Distance Warning* (p. 288)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
City Safety (p. 330)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
319
Limitations of the radar unit
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
12
.
The radar unit is placed inside the upper section
of the windscreen together with the car's camera
unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
with the message
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual, it means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possi-
ble causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov-
ered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
12
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
320
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals
or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera
and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
Vehicle speed
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles
ahead is reduced significantly if:
the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi-
cantly different from that of your own car
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between your car and the vehi-
cle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
Low trailers
Low trailer in radar shadow.
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
should therefore be particularly careful when driv-
ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
321
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop
must be contacted to have the windscreen
replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
In order that the radar and camera unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
Radar unit (p. 318)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 290)
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 300)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
323
Type approval for radar units
Type approval for the car's radar units can be
seen in the following table.
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Europe
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics &
Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
The United Arab Emi-
rates
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
324
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Indonesia
37295/POSTEL/2014
4927
38806/SDPPI/2015
4927
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Korea
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
Moldavia
1024
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
325
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Singapore
Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
South Africa
TA-2014/1824
APPROVED
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
Taiwan
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB15LP0680T0
A
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
B
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
Radar unit (p. 318)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
326
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver sup-
port systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
Adaptive cruise control*
Lane assistance*
Driver Alert Control*
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Run-off Mitigation
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
Related information
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
City Safety (p. 330)
Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 138)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
327
Limitations of the camera unit
The camera unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Impaired vision
The camera has limitations similar to the human
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the
functions of camera-dependent systems could be
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig-
nificantly reduce camera function when it is used
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
13
.
The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec-
tion of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
with the message
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual, it means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possi-
ble causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
13
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
328
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or
covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam-
era and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop
must be contacted to have the windscreen
replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
329
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
In order that the radar and camera unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 326)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 314)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 352)
DRIVER SUPPORT
330
City Safety
City Safety uses visual, haptic and acoustic sig-
nals to alert the driver of any pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and vehicles that appear.
The car then brakes automatically unless the
driver him/herself acts within a reasonable time.
Location of the radar unit
14
.
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
of collision if the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or swerving.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce-
dure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well out-
side normal driving style and may be perceived as
uncomfortable.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven-
tion.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
where a collision is immediately imminent.
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle
ahead or a bicycle by reducing the speed of the
car by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For a pedestrian,
City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h
(28 mph).
If the speed difference is greater than 50 km/h
(30 mph) or 45 km/h (28 mph) respectively, City
Safety's automatic braking cannot prevent a colli-
sion but it can mitigate the consequences of a
collision.
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The braking function for
large animals is primarily intended to reduce the
collision force at high speeds. Braking is most
effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and
less effective at low speeds.
14
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
331
WARNING
City Safety is an aid and does not work in all
driving situations, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section and the section
"Limitations for City Safety" inform about limi-
tations that the driver should be aware of
before using City Safety.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph).
City Safety's auto-brake function can prevent
a collision or reduce collision speed. To
ensure full brake performance, the driver
should always depress the brake pedal - even
if the car auto-brakes.
City Safety does not activates any auto-brake
functions in the event of heavy acceleration.
The driver is always responsible for maintain-
ing the correct distance and speed - never
wait for a collision warning or for City Safety
to intervene.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
Search path in the top menu:
Settings My
Car
IntelliSafe
Overview
Function overview
14
.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
ing order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani-
mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
means of a red flashing warning signal, an acous-
tic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a
brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking
or acceleration there will be no haptic warning.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
14
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
332
Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
begin with light braking and then progress to full
brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
car has been braked to avoid collision with a
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
ped the car, unless the driver has managed to
depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
vention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the
braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
Related information
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 332)
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 333)
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 336)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 335)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)
Messages for City Safety (p. 339)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
City Safety is always activated, but it is possible
to select the warning distance for the function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
vated. It is activated automatically when the
engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric
operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity
of the system and regulates the distance at
which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings
shall be triggered.
1.
Tap on
Settings in top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe.
3.
Under
City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
If the
Early setting produces too many warnings,
which could be perceived as irritating in certain
situations, then use the Normal or Late warning
distance.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced. This would lead to the system warning
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
333
at a later stage, which reduces the total number
of warnings.
The Late warning distance should only be used
in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving.
NOTE
City Safety warns the driver when there is a
risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the
driver’s reaction time.
With the warning distance set at Early, the
warnings will come more in advance. This may
mean that the warnings come more often
than for warning distance Normal.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Early warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee 100 %
correct function in all situations. Therefore,
never test City Safety by driving at people,
animals or vehicles - this may cause severe
damage and injury and risk lives.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City
Safety in cross traffic" section.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
334
bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
ment.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
tem cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all
cyclists in all situations and, for example, can-
not see:
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
trians with clear body outlines.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clear-
est possible information about the body outline,
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor-
mal human pattern of movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
either be detected late or not at all, which may
mean that warnings and braking are late or omit-
ted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is an aid and cannot detect all
pedestrians in all situations and, for example,
cannot see:
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
335
Large animals
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
clear body outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
horse) must receive the clearest possible infor-
mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
ity to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all
large animals in all situations and, for exam-
ple, cannot see:
partially obscured large animals.
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
large animals that run or move quickly.
large animals if the background contrast
of the animals is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
small animals such as dogs and cats, for
example.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety can help the driver when turning and
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection.
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross-
ing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first
enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana-
lyse the situation.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
336
The following further criteria must also be fulfil-
led:
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on.
WARNING
City Safety is an aid and does not work in all
driving situations, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
Warnings and brake interventions due to a
collision risk with an oncoming vehicle often
come very late.
The driver is always responsible for maintain-
ing the correct distance and speed - never
wait for a collision warning or for City Safety
to intervene.
Limitations in cross traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
oncoming cross traffic. Examples are:
stability control ESC intervenes in the event
of slippery driving conditions
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some-
thing
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
automatically braking the car earlier when it is
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta-
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
City Safety does not intervene with the auto-
brake function as long as the driver him/herself
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
337
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
WARNING
City Safety's ability to anticipate a certain sit-
uation is an aid, and does not work in all driv-
ing situations or traffic, weather and road con-
ditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regu-
lations are followed.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 337)
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
net limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC will
give the best possible braking force with main-
tained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
light, reflections, when sunglasses are being
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-
cles in some situations cannot be detected, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
the car. This means that the functionality of City
Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam-
era and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
338
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds -
below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there-
fore does not intervene in situations where your
car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
warning/intervention in situations where the
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
delay a collision warning and intervention in order
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
Miscellaneous
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if a traffic situa-
tion or external influences mean that the cam-
era and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.
For vehicles to be detected at night, their
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
switched on and shining clearly.
The camera and radar unit has a limited range
for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can
provide effective warnings and brake interven-
tions as long as the relative speed is below
50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-
moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large
animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and
can be achieved at vehicle speeds above
70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake
intervention for large animals is less effective
at lower speeds.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi-
cles and large animals could be disengaged
due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds exceeding 70 km/h (43 mph).
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera-dependent func-
tions.
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the
camera sensor may reduce its function, fully
deactivate it or give incorrect function
response.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the "Limita-
tions for radar unit" section.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 319)
DRIVER SUPPORT
339
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Automatic intervention
City Safety
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
340
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle
approaching from behind.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is immi-
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph),
the RCW function detects that the car is in dan-
ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten-
sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the
Whiplash Protection System safety system is
activated.
Immediately before the collision, RCW may also
activate the foot brake in order to reduce the for-
ward acceleration of the car during the collision.
However, the foot brake is only activated if the
car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi-
ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Limitations
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can be for example:
if the vehicle approaching from the rear is
detected too late
if the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lane at the last moment
if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due to
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
part of the function is deactivated.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
City Safety (p. 330)
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 332)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
Blind Spot Information*
The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function is
designed to give a warning of vehicles diago-
nally behind and to the side of your car so as to
give assistance in heavy traffic on roads with
several lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
341
Location of BLIS lamp
15
.
Indicator lamp
The BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view activates/deactivates the function.
Principle of Blind Spot Information
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica-
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
vates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
Blind Spot Information does not work on
sharp bends.
Blind Spot Information does not work when
the car is reversing.
WARNING
Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid
and does not work in all situations.
Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a
safe driving style and the use of rearview and
door mirrors.
Blind Spot Information can never replace
responsibility and attention by the driver. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to change
lanes in a safe manner.
15
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
342
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replace-
ment for, a safe driving style and use of the
rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driv-
er's attention and responsibility. The responsi-
bility for changing lanes safely always rests
with the driver.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information*
(p. 342)
Limitations of Blind Spot Information*
(p. 343)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Activate/deactivate Blind Spot
Information*
The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function can
be activated/deactivated.
Location of Blind Spot Information lamp
16
.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
Tap on the BLIS button in function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
lights will then be illuminated.
WARNING
Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid
and does not work in all situations.
Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a
safe driving style and the use of rearview and
door mirrors.
Blind Spot Information can never replace
responsibility and attention by the driver. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to change
lanes in a safe manner.
Related information
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
Limitations of Blind Spot Information*
(p. 343)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
16
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
343
Limitations of Blind Spot
Information*
The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of limitations:
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system.
Sensors
The sensors for the BLIS function are located
inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The
sensors are also used by the Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) function.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
17
.
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area
of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information*
(p. 342)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)
Cross Traffic Alert*
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver aid that is
intended to warn of crossing traffic when the car
is reversing. CTA is a supplement to Blind Spot
Information (BLIS).
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements the functionality of BLIS by
providing the ability to see crossing traffic
approaching from the side, such as while revers-
ing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if
reverse gear has been selected.
17
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
344
If CTA has sensed that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to
the direction from which the object
approaches.
an illuminated icon in the PAS graphics on
the screen.
an icon on the Park assist camera top view.
Illuminated CTA icon in the PAS graphic on the screen.
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's responsi-
bility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 344)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
Alert*
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function can be
activated/deactivated.
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Tap on the Cross Traffic Alert button in
function view.
>
GREEN button indication - CTA is acti-
vated.
GREY button indication - CTA is deac-
tivated.
CTA is always in activated mode after the engine
is started.
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's responsi-
bility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
345
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function may have
limitations in certain situations.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi-
cles or obstructing obstacles.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system.
Sensors
The sensors for the CTA function are located
inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The
sensors are also used by the Blind Spot
Information (BLIS) function.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
346
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
18
.
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape, labels or similar
within the area of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 344)
Messages for Blind Spot Information* and
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 347)
Limitations of Blind Spot Information*
(p. 343)
18
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
347
Messages for Blind Spot
Information* and Cross Traffic Alert*
A number of messages regarding Blind Spot
Information (BLIS) and Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Related information
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information*
(p. 342)
Limitations of Blind Spot Information*
(p. 343)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 344)
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 108)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
348
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information function (Road Sign
Information – RSI) helps the driver to observe
speed signs and certain prohibition signs as the
car passes them.
Examples of readable signs
19
.
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is star-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
In the case where both a sign for motorway/dual
carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are
passed, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's
speed scale.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable road traffic rules and reg-
ulations are followed.
Related information
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 348)
Speed camera information* (p. 350)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 351)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 352)
Sign display with Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information function (Road Sign
Information - RSI) registers and shows road
signs in different ways depending on the sign
and the situation.
Example of detected speed information
20
.
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
symbol plus an indication in red on the speedom-
eter.
19
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
20
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
349
Besides the speed limit symbol
an additional sign may be
shown as well, such as "no
overtaking".
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign at
the roadside, the symbol for
this sign flashes on and off on
the driver display as a warning.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the
Audio
Warning function is activated - see the heading
"Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in
the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information".
End of restriction or motorway
If RSI detects a sign which may imply the end of
a speed limit, such as the end of a motorway, the
driver display shows the corresponding road sign
for 10–30 seconds.
Examples of such signs are:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
Following which, the sign information is hidden
until the next speed-related sign is detected.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs
20
.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
the same road - an additional sign then indicates
the circumstances under which the different
speeds apply. The road section may be particu-
larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a
speed sign with the additional sign “trailer”, the
indicated speed will appear on the driver display.
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
by means of a symbol for an
additional sign below the speed
symbol. The additional symbol
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
“TIME”.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's speed
symbol means that the RSI has
detected an additional sign
with supplementary information
for the current speed limit.
20
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
350
Sensus Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
On detecting signs that indirectly indicate a
speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriage-
way and city limit signs.
If a previously detected sign is assumed not
to apply any longer, but no new sign has
been detected.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
related information.
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If the warning sign for "School"
or "Children at play" is included
in the satellite navigator's map
data, the driver display shows a
sign
20
of this type.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 351)
Speed camera information*
A car equipped with Sensus Navigation can pro-
vide information on an upcoming speed camera
in the driver display.
Speed camera warning in the driver display.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit, the driver can be
warned when the car
approaches a speed camera,
provided that the navigation
maps for the market in ques-
tion contain information on
speed cameras.
For more information on speed warning in con-
nection with speed camera, see the heading
"Activating/deactivating speed warnings" in the
section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign Infor-
mation" as well as the section "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
NOTE
Information about speed cameras in the navi-
gation maps is not available for all markets.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 351)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 352)
20
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
351
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information (Road Sign
Information - RSI) function can be activated/
deactivated.
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Tap on the Road Sign Information button
in function view.
> RSI is activated and the button shows a
green indicator - a grey indicator means
that RSI is deactivated.
Activating/deactivating speed warnings
The speed warning function warns the driver
when the applicable speed limit is exceeded. A
speed warning is always given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with speed camera infor-
mation. The driver can choose to have the func-
tion activated or deactivated.
The speed warning is given by
the driver display symbol show-
ing the applicable maximum
permitted speed temporarily
flashing when this speed is
exceeded.
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign
Information
.
3.
Select
Speed Limit Warning to activate/
deactivate speed warnings.
> A speed selector is shown if the function
is activated.
4. Adjust the limit for when a speed warning is
to be given, either up or down, by pressing
the up/down arrows.
Note that no consideration is given to any
boundary adjustment made when the driver
display shows the speed camera symbol.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
warning.
It is also possible to have an acoustic warning in
connection with a speed warning:
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign
Information
.
3.
Select
Audio Warning to activate/deacti-
vate the acoustic warning.
With the
Audio Warning function activated, the
driver is also warned when driving towards a no-
entry entrance.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Speed camera information* (p. 350)
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 348)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
352
Limitations of Road Sign
Information*
The Road Sign Information Road Sign
Information - RSI function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Examples of things that can reduce the RSI func-
tion are as follows:
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
digital road maps
21
are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information
22
.
NOTE
The RSI function can interpret some types of
bicycle rack (connected to the electrical
socket for trailers) as a connected trailer. In
such cases the driver may be shown incorrect
speed information.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 348)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 351)
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 348)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control function is intended to
attract the driver's attention when he/she starts
to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes
distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
A camera detects the edge markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the alignment of
the road with the driver’s steering wheel move-
ments.
21
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
22
Map data with speed information is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
353
If driving behaviour becomes
seriously erratic, the driver is
alerted by means of an acous-
tic signal combined with a sym-
bol in the driver display and the
message
Time for a break
soon?.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving
ability does not improve.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu-
lar intervals, and make sure you are well
rested.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a
sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-
ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
WARNING
Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa-
tions but is designed merely as a supplemen-
tary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 353)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
1.
Tap on
Settings in top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select
Alertness Warning to activate/deac-
tivate the DAC.
WARNING
Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa-
tions but is designed merely as a supplemen-
tary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Activating/deactivating the rest place
guide in the event of a warning
It is possible to select whether the rest place
guide shall be activated or deactivated. With the
guide activated a proposal for a suitable rest
place is presented at the same time as DAC
gives a warning.
1.
Tap on
Settings in top view in the centre
display.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
354
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select
Rest Stop Guidance to activate/
deactivate the rest place guide.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 354)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases, driving behaviour may not be
affected, despite the driver being tired - e.g. when
using the Pilot Assist function - with the result
that the driver is then not given a warning from
DAC. For this reason, it is always very important
to stop and take a break in the event of the
slightest sign of driver fatigue, regardless of
whether DAC has given a warning.
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple:
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 352)
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 353)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Lane Keeping Aid
The function of lane assistance is to help the
driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving its own lane on motorways and similar
major routes.
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane
and/or warns the driver with an acoustic signal or
steering wheel vibration.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
in which case it goes into standby mode. The
function becomes available again when the road
is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
355
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations
23
.
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
1. Steering assistance activated: When the car
is approaching a lane line, LKA will actively
steer the car back into its lane by applying a
slight torque to the steering wheel.
2. Warning activated: If the car is about to cross
a lane line, the driver is warned by means of
an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering
wheel.
NOTE
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
from Lane assistance.
WARNING
Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
does not engage in all driving situations or
traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regu-
lations are followed.
Steering assistance
A precondition for the functioning of the LKA
steering assistance is that the driver’s hands are
holding the steering wheel. The system monitors
this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol and the following
message, to prompt the driver
to actively steer the car:
Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym-
bol is shown again, combined with a warning
sound and this message:
Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering
applied
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt
to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode -
the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
23
The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
356
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
Limitations
In certain demanding conditions lane assistance
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
function.
Examples of such conditions are:
road works
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines
roads with unclear or non-existent line mark-
ings.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 356)
Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 358)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping
Aid
Lane assistance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) can be
activated/deactivated and some subfunctions
can be selected.
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Tap on the Lane Keeping Aid button in
function view.
> LKA is activated (GREEN button indica-
tion is shown) or deactivated (GREY but-
ton indication is shown).
Select the type of warning for the Lane
Keeping Aid
It is possible to select how LKA shall warn the
driver if the car leaves its lane.
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe Lane
Assistance
.
DRIVER SUPPORT
357
3.
Under
Lane Keeping Aid Warning
Feedback, select type of warning:
Sound - the driver is warned by an
acoustic signal.
Vibration — the driver is warned with
steering wheel vibrations.
Assistance options for Lane Keeping
Aid
It is possible to select how LKA shall react if the
driver if the car leaves its lane.
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car IntelliSafe Lane
Assistance
.
3.
Under
Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how
LKA shall react
Assist - the driver is given steering assis-
tance without a warning.
Both - the driver is given both a warning
and steering assistance.
Warning — warning to driver only.
Related information
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 358)
DRIVER SUPPORT
358
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding
lane assistance can be shown on the driver dis-
play.
Symbol in the driver display
Lane assistance is visualised by
symbols in the driver display
depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are white.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Unavailable
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are grey.
The lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym-
bol are in colour.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv-
ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
Symbols and messages
The following table shows some examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
359
Symbol Message Specification
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not hold the wheel. Follow
the instruction and steer the car.
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Related information
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 356)
DRIVER SUPPORT
360
Run-off Mitigation
The function of Run-off Mitigation is to assist the
driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving the road by means of actively steering
the car back onto the road.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible side markings/lane lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to cross
the edge of the road, Run-off Mitigation will
actively steer the car back onto the road. In addi-
tion, if steering intervention is considered insuffi-
cient to avoid run-off, brake intervention may also
be activated.
Run-off Mitigation does not intervene with either
steering assistance or brake intervention if the
direction indicators are used. If the function
detects that the driver is driving the car in an
active way, activation of Run-off Mitigation will be
suppressed for a short time.
The function has two activation levels:
Steering assistance only
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance
Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance.
Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance
and brake intervention
Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance
and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending
on the situation at the time of run-off.
Settings for Run-off Mitigation
The Run-off Mitigation function is selectable -
the driver can select On or Off by dragging down
the centre display's top view and there searching
for the following:
Settings My Car IntelliSafe Lane
Assistance
To activate Run-off Mitigation:
Select the box at
Collision Avoidance
Assistance, Steering aid during
increased collision risk - the function is
then activated.
The current setting for Run-off Mitigation when
the engine is switched off remains the next time
the engine is started.
Limitations of Run-off Mitigation
In certain demanding conditions, Run-off Mitiga-
tion may have difficulty helping the driver cor-
rectly. In such cases, it is recommended that the
function be switched off.
Examples of such conditions are:
road works
winter road conditions
DRIVER SUPPORT
361
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
ings
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings.
WARNING
The road run-off protection function is only a
driver aid and does not work in all driving sit-
uations, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The function cannot detect barriers, rails or
similar obstacles at the side of the road.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regu-
lations are followed.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Symbols and messages for Run-off Mitiga-
tion (p. 362)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 354)
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 327)
DRIVER SUPPORT
362
Symbols and messages for Run-off
Mitigation
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Automatic intervention
City Safety
When Run-off Mitigation is activated, a message is shown to the driver informing that the
system has been activated.
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Related information
Run-off Mitigation (p. 360)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
363
Park Assist*
Parking assistance assists the driver when
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the
distance to obstacles by acoustic signals com-
bined with graphics on the centre display.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
cles behind is also active when the car is station-
ary.
At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle
behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant
and the active sensor's field closest to the car
symbol is filled.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
view's
Settings menu option.
NOTE
Acoustic warnings are only given for
objects directly on the vehicle's route.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near
the car.
Backwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres
behind the car.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
364
Along the sides
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm from
the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles on
the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
Forwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The front parking assistance sensors are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 0.8 metres in
front of the car.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
Activating/deactivating Parking assistance*
(p. 365)
Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 365)
Messages for Park Assist* (p. 367)
Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
365
Activating/deactivating Parking
assistance*
The Parking assistance function can be acti-
vated/deactivated.
The front and side parking assistance sensors
are activated automatically when the engine is
started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Parking assistance can also be
activated/deactivated from the
camera views.
Tap on the Park Assist button in function
view.
> Parking assistance is activated/deacti-
vated, a green/grey indicator is displayed
in the button.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 363)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Limitations of Parking assistance*
The Parking assistance function may have limita-
tions in certain situations.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the dis-
tance to an object behind the car.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sen-
sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect-
edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
Maintenance
Location of the parking sensors
24
.
For parking assistance to work optimally, the
parking assistance sensors must be cleaned reg-
ularly with water and car shampoo.
24
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
366
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 363)
Activating/deactivating Parking assistance*
(p. 365)
Messages for Park Assist* (p. 367)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
367
Messages for Park Assist*
A number of messages regarding Park Assist
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the system's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 363)
Activating/deactivating Parking assistance*
(p. 365)
Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
368
Park Assist Camera*
The Park Assist Camera helps the driver when
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obsta-
cles with a camera image and graphics in the
centre display.
Overview
The Park Assist Camera is activated either auto-
matically, when reverse gear is selected or man-
ually via the centre display - depending on the
selected setting.
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
assist line*
25
PAS* - activates/deactivates Parking assis-
tance
CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
Zoom
26
- zoom in/out
WARNING
The parking camera serves as an aid. It
does not relieve the driver of responsibil-
ity when reversing.
The camera has blind spots, where obsta-
cles cannot be detected.
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
Camera views
The function can display a composite 360° view
and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view. The upper-
most in the selected view denotes which camera
is active.
360° view camera*
The approximate coverage area of the Park Assist Cam-
eras.
The four sides of the car are shown simultane-
ously in the centre display, which helps the driver
to observe what is around the car when manoeu-
vring at slow speeds.
Every camera view can be activated separately by
tapping on the screen on the desired camera's
"field of vision" - e.g. in front of or above the front
camera.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
tance* then distance to detected obstacles is
illustrated with fields in different colours.
25
Not available in all markets.
26
The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
369
Backwards
The backwards-facing camera
27
is fitted above the reg-
istration plate.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area
behind the car. For certain models, part of the
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may appear
slightly tilted — this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the centre display may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
Forwards
The forwards parking camera
27
is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
camera is switched off.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph), and
the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
60 seconds after the forward-facing camera has
been switched off, the camera is reactivated.
NOTE
Automatic reactivation of the front camera on
speed reduction requires that
Auto Camera
Reverse Activation is selected in Settings
My Car Park Assist.
The sides
The side cameras
27
are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras show what is along each side
of the car.
Related information
Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)
Park assist lines and fields for the Park
Assist Camera* (p. 370)
Limitations of the Park Assist Camera*
(p. 373)
Park Assist* (p. 363)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 343)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
27
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
370
Park assist lines and fields for the
Park Assist Camera*
The Park Assist Camera indicates the position of
the car in relation to its surroundings by display-
ing lines on the camera image.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed
for the driver.
Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
the driver the path the car will take - also when
the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
Park assist lines are not shown when zoom-
ing in.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the lines
on the display show the route the car will
take - not the trailer.
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's elec-
trical system.
IMPORTANT
Remember that when rear camera view is
selected, the centre display only shows the
area behind the car. Keep an eye on the sides
and front of the car when turning the steering
wheel while reversing.
The same applies vice versa - note what hap-
pens to the rear parts of the car when the
front camera view is selected.
Note that the guide lines show the shortest
route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the
car's sides so that they do not go against/
over something when the steering wheel is
turned when driving forward or that the front
sweeps against/over something when the
steering wheel is turned when reversing.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
371
Park assist lines in 360° view*
360° view with park assist lines.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown
behind, in front of and at the side of the car
(depending on the direction of travel):
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
If front camera or reversing camera has been
selected, park assist lines are displayed without
regard to the car's direction of travel. The
selected side camera is used to show the park
assist lines only while reversing.
Towbar assist line
Towbar with assist line.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line*.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
1.
Press
Towbar (1).
> The assist line for the intended "path" of
the towbar is shown. At the same time the
car's park assist lines are extinguished.
2.
Press
Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot
be shown at the same time.
Sensor field from Parking assistance*
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance*
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car
symbol to the right.
The fields for the front and reversing sensors
change colour as the distance to the obstacle
decreases — from yellow through orange to red.
Colours of front and
reversing fields
Distance (metres)
Yellow 0,6–1,5
Orange 0,4–0,6
Red 0–0,4
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
372
Sensor field to the sides
The side fields are only shown in orange.
Colour of side fields Distance (metres)
Orange 0–0.3
Related information
Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)
Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)
Limitations of the Park Assist Camera*
(p. 373)
Starting the Park Assist Camera*
The Park Assist Camera can be made to start
automatically when reverse gear is selected or
manually via the centre display.
Starting the Park Assist Camera
To start the park assist camera
manually:
Press the Camera button in the centre dis-
play's function view.
> The Park Assist Camera is started.
Camera start in different situations
When the button is tapped, the vehicle’s speed
and direction determine whether the camera
starts in top view or front view:
Top view: When stationary and moving for-
ward - 0-15 km/h (0-9 mph).
Top view: When stationary and moving back-
ward - independent of speed.
Front view: When moving forward
15-22 km/h (9-14 mph).
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of the Park Assist Camera
It is possible to activate/deactivate the automatic
starting of the Park Assist Camera when reverse
gear is selected.
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Park Assist.
3.
Select
Auto Camera Reverse Activation
to activate/deactivate automatic start.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view is extinguished at 25 km/h
(16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver. If the
Auto Camera Reverse Activation setting is
selected, the camera is reactivated automatically
at 22 km/h (14 mph) within 60 seconds. If speed
exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph) then the front view is
not reactivated.
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and not reactivated.
Select basic view for Park Assist
Camera backward
With the Auto Camera Reverse Activation
function selected, the driver can also select which
camera function should be activated for reversing
- the rearward-facing camera or the 360° view*.
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
373
2.
Press
My Car Park Assist.
3.
Select
Rear View Instead of 360° to acti-
vate/deactivate the rear camera view as
basic view.
Related information
Park assist lines and fields for the Park
Assist Camera* (p. 370)
Limitations of the Park Assist Camera*
(p. 373)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Limitations of the Park Assist
Camera*
The Park Assist Camera function may have limi-
tations in certain situations.
The Park Assist Camera cannot see all objects in
every situation - a driver should be aware of the
following limitations:
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the cam-
era's view.
Blind sectors
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
undetected until the car is very close to the
obstacle.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the gaps between the individual cameras.
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black and
contains this symbol then it
means that the camera is out
of order. The following illustra-
tion shows an example.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
374
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol-
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
open door
open tailgate
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
Maintenance
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
Park Assist Camera* (p. 368)
Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 372)
Park assist lines and fields for the Park
Assist Camera* (p. 370)
Park Assist Pilot*
Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot -
PAP) helps the driver to park in or leave a park-
ing space.
PAP checks first if a space is sufficiently big and
thereafter helps the driver to turn the steering
wheel and manoeuvre the car into the space.
The centre display indicates with symbols, graph-
ics and text the various operations to be carried
out and when to do so.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
375
WARNING
PAP does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always has the final responsibility
for driving the car in a safe manner and for
paying attention to the surroundings and
other road users approaching or passing
while parking.
Types of parking situations
PAP can be used for the following different park-
ing situations.
Parallel parking
The principal of parallel parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park-
ing space" in the section "Parking with Active
parking assistance".
Perpendicular parking
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
forward/backward.
NOTE
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis-
ted by the PAP
Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be
used for a parallel-parked car.
Related information
Parking with Active parking assistance*
(p. 376)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
376
Parking with Active parking
assistance*
The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot -
PAP) helps the driver park in three steps. The
function can also help the driver to leave a park-
ing space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
No trailer is attached to the car.
Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres while PAP
is searching for a parking space.
Parking
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear.
Finding and measuring parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function
view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
Principle for parallel parking.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
perpendicular parking.
2.
Tap on the
Park In button in function view.
> PAP searches for a parking space and
checks whether it is big enough.
3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be ready
to stop the car when the graphic and mes-
sage indicate that a suitable parking space
has been found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
377
NOTE
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
senger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
Reversing in to the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
1. Check that there is nothing behind.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
> PAP will then steer the car into the park-
ing space.
3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre-
pared to stop the car when the graphics and
message so request.
NOTE
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
378
Positioning the car in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
1.
Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward
2. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre-
pared to stop the car when the graphics and
message so request.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back-
wards.
4. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre-
pared to stop the car when the graphics and
message so request.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Leaving a parking space
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out
function must only be used for a parallel-
parked car - it does not work for a perpendic-
ular-parked car.
The Park Out function is acti-
vated in the centre display's
function view.
1.
Tap on the
Park Out button in function view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3. Keep an eye the centre display. follow the
instructions in the same way as during park-
ing.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking
space.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
parking space without any extra manoeuvring
then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
parking space.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
379
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot
– PAP) function may have limitations in certain
situations.
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
if the driver moves the steering wheel
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
if the driver presses
Cancel in the centre
display
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
Where applicable, a message in the centre dis-
play states the reason for a parking sequence
being discontinued.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent meas-
urement.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
The driver must therefore be prepared to inter-
rupt a parking step.
There are also a few details to bear in mind while
parking, e.g.:
PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
already parked nearby - if they are inap-
propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb.
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
parking space when PAP measures the
space.
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while
being parked.
Objects situated higher than the detection
areas of the sensors are not taken into
account when calculating the parking
manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to turn into
the parking space too early, and hence such
parking spaces should be avoided.
The driver is responsible for determining
whether the space selected by PAP is suita-
ble for parking.
Use approved tyres
28
with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
from the car.
Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
28
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
380
IMPORTANT
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
PAP sensor locations
29
.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
shampoo.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
Parking with Active parking assistance*
(p. 376)
29
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
381
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
A number of messages regarding Park Assist
Pilot – PAP can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the systems' sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 374)
Parking with Active parking assistance*
(p. 376)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
384
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter-
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
main display. For information about a specific
alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or the
alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep-
arate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
Select Bypass by pressing once on the O
button on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
> The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the
car can be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service
is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
lation.
Related information
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 384)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
rect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 384)
Starting the car (p. 386)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
385
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the differ-
ent functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual.
The following table shows the functions available
in each ignition position/level:
Level Functions
0
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
Power seats can be adjusted.
The power windows can be used.
The centre display is started and
can be used.
It is possible to start the audio.
The functions are time-controlled in
this ignition position and are switched
off automatically after a period of time.
I
Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger com-
partment, navigation, phone, venti-
lation fan and windscreen wipers
can be used.
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
The audio is started automatically
if it was running when the car was
left.
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
Level Functions
II
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the car has
been started.
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery and
should therefore be avoided!
Selecting ignition position
Start knob in the tunnel console.
Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
386
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
Ignition position I - Turn the ignition dial to
START and release it. The control automati-
cally returns to its starting position.
Ignition position II - Turn the ignition dial to
START and hold it in the START position for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
Back to ignition position 0 - To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II -
Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it.
The control automatically returns to its star-
ting position.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 386)
Switching off the car (p. 387)
Driver display (p. 90)
Starting the car
The car is started using the remote control key
and the start knob in the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since the car is equipped
with support for keyless starting (Passive Start).
To start the car:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the keyless
locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*),
the key can be anywhere in the car.
2. For cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with manual gear changing, make
sure that the gear lever is in neutral position
and that either the clutch pedal or the brake
pedal is depressed.
3.
Depress the brake pedal fully
1
.
4.
Turn the start knob to START and release it.
The control automatically returns to its star-
ting position.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
If the message Car key not found is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key on the backup reader in the cup
holder. Then try to start again.
1
If the car is moving, then you simply need to turn the start knob towards START to start the engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
387
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
tery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Switching off the car (p. 387)
Remote control key (p. 236)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 257)
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the ignition dial in
the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it
- the car is switched off. The control auto-
matically returns to its starting position.
If the gear selector is not in P position or if the
car is moving:
Hold the dial in the STOP position until the
car switches off.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 386)
STARTING AND DRIVING
388
Steering lock
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
can be perceived when the steering lock locks
or unlocks.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will lock automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, it
is sufficient that the remote control key is inside
the passenger compartment and the engine is
started by turning the start knob towards START
in order to unlock the steering lock.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 386)
Switching off the car (p. 387)
Steering wheel (p. 131)
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be started with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
(2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's negative jump-starting point
(4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
389
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's
clamps comes into contact with the car's
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's
positive terminal or the clamp connected to
the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 534)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's driveline (power
transmission) between engine and drive wheels.
The function of the gearbox is to change the
gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
automatic.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto-
matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
changes means that the engine's torque and
power range can be used effectively. In the auto-
matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually with
the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
rently in use.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
ponents, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown -
follow the recommendation given.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
390
Symbols in the driver display
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message.
Symbol Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommenda-
tion given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow
the recommendation given.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 390)
Manual gearbox (p. 392)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
Gear positions in the driver display
The driver display shows the gear selector's posi-
tion:
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
also shown.
Gear positions
Park position - P
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be sta-
tionary when the park position is selected.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
park position, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the ignition position must be II.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first
when the car is parked.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
tionary when reverse position is selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to change from the neutral position to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
391
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when changing gear from R position to
D position.
Manual gearshift mode - M
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the
gear selector sideways from position D to the
end position at "±". The driver display shows
which gear is engaged at the time.
Press the gear selector forwards to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
Press the gear selector backwards to ""
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
manual gearshift mode in the driver display
2
.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri-
ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking
and stalling.
To return to automatic gear changing, press the
gear selector sideways to the end position at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change
one or more gears at a time depending on
engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Related information
Gearbox (p. 389)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 395)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 394)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
2
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on the car's equipment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
392
Manual gearbox
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit-
able gear manually, according to speed and
power requirements at the time.
Changing gear
The manual gearbox has six gears, the shifting
pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.
Gearing pattern.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position, N
before moving it to R position.
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
During parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information
Gearbox (p. 389)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)
Gear shift indicator*
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
gear in good time.
STARTING AND DRIVING
393
With automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi-
cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom-
mended.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
With manual gearbox
An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to
a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended
change to a lower gear.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
Related information
Gearbox (p. 389)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 390)
Manual gearbox (p. 392)
STARTING AND DRIVING
394
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental
changing between different gear positions in an
automatic gearbox.
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
itor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special
safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-
charged battery, the gear selector must be
moved to the N position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
the compartment.
Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
hold.
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the button.
4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 390)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
395
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates cur-
rent gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles.
Manual gearshift mode
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Changing gear
To change gear one step:
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Manual deactivation in gear position D.
Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
396
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
This is indicated by means of the figure for the
current gear extinguishing.
The exception is during engine braking - then the
paddles are activated for as long as engine brak-
ing is in progress.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva-
tion.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 390)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 392)
Start/Stop
With the Start/Stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has stop-
ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed.
Start/Stop is one of several energy-saving func-
tions intended to reduce fuel consumption, which
in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an envi-
ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information
Using the Start/Stop function (p. 396)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 398)
Using the Start/Stop function
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
the engine when stationary and then restarts it
automatically when the journey is resumed.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
engine is started and can be activated if certain
conditions have been met. The driver display indi-
cates whether the function is available, active or
unavailable, see heading "Symbols in driver dis-
play" below.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli-
mate control system's fan speed or extremely
high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to auto-
stop:
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
397
With automatic gearbox
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
With manual gearbox
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi-
tion and release the clutch pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
In drive mode
Eco or Comfort
3
, the engine may
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With the
Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist func-
tion activated, the engine will autostop after
approximately three seconds.
See the section "Conditions for Start/Stop func-
tion".
Autostart
The following is required for the engine to auto-
start:
With automatic gearbox
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling
backwards.
When the
Auto hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
When the
Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist
function are activated, the engine will autos-
tart when the accelerator pedal is depressed,
or by pressing the
button on the left
keypad of the steering wheel.
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
With manual gearbox
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Symbols in the driver display
With 12-inch driver display
The text
READY is shown in the tachometer
when the function is available.
A pointer in the tachometer points to
READY when the function is active and the
engine is auto-stopped.
The text
READY is greyed out when the
function is not available.
No text is shown when the function is deacti-
vated.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
3
Normal start mode.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
398
With 8-inch driver display
The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the
speedometer.
Symbol Specification
White symbol: The function is avail-
able.
Beige symbol: The function is
active and the engine is auto-stop-
ped.
The function is not available, the
conditions are not fulfilled.
No symbol is shown when the
function is deactivated.
Deactivating the function
In certain situations it may be desirable to tempo-
rarily deactivate the function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is
switched off when the function
is deactivated.
The function is deactivated until
it is reactivated
the drive mode is changed to
Eco or
Comfort
the next time the car is started.
Related information
Start/Stop (p. 396)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 398)
Hill start assist (p. 412)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 307)
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the driver display. See the section "Using the
Start/Stop function".
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
The engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
The ambient temperature is under -5 °C or
above approx. 30 °C.
the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
the car is reversed.
The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
399
The driver makes sweeping steering wheel
movements.
The road is very steep.
The bonnet is opened.
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating tempera-
ture.
The ABS system has been activated.
In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated).
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
The exhaust system's particulate filter is full
4
.
A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
The gearbox is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
The gear selector is in ± position.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not auto-
start after having auto-stopped:
With automatic gearbox:
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
P position and the driver's door is open - a
normal start must take place.
With manual gearbox:
The driver is unrestrained.
A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
as follows:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. A message is shown in the
driver display - follow the recommendation
given.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
High humidity in the passenger compartment
forms misting on the windows.
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
The bonnet is opened.
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
The gear selector is moved from D to posi-
tion R or ±.
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
4
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
400
Related information
Start/Stop (p. 396)
Using the Start/Stop function (p. 396)
Support battery (p. 537)
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situa-
tions.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
Steering
Engine/gearbox
5
/all-wheel drive
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Start/Stop function
Climate settings
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes can be selected in all situations.
Selecting drive mode
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
A message is shown when a drive mode is unse-
lectable, for example:
Cannot be selected because gear is in
manual
Cannot be selected due to low battery
5
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
401
Cannot be selected due to low
temperature
Cannot be selected due to limitations
Cannot be selected because speed is
too high.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
This is the car's normal mode.
When the car starts, it is in
Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set-
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for car-
bon dioxide emissions.
ECO
Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving with the
Eco mode.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output of
certain climate settings is reduced.
The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili-
tates fuel-efficient driving.
More information on this drive mode is found in
the section "Drive mode ECO".
OFF ROAD
Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads.
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation
and low speed function with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded,
Off
Road mode is suspended and another drive
mode is activated.
In the
Off Road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachom-
eter.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
IMPORTANT
The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used
while driving with a trailer without trailer con-
nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to
the air bellows.
DYNAMIC
Dynamic mode means that the car has
sportier characteristics and faster response
to accelerating.
The gear changes become faster and more dis-
tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
Steering response is faster and shock absorption
is harder
6
which means that the body follows the
roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
6
Applies to Four-C.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
402
INDIVIDUAL
Adapting a drive mode according to individ-
ual preferences.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving cha-
racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi-
vidual driver profile.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
Settings view
7
for individual drive mode.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select
Individual Drive Mode.
3.
In
Presets, select a drive mode to start from:
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
Driver Display
Steering force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Start/Stop.
Related information
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 272)
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 405)
Start/Stop (p. 396)
Drive mode ECO (p. 403)
All-wheel drive (p. 406)
Hill descent control (p. 415)
7
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
403
Drive mode ECO
Driving mode ECO mode optimises the car's
driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ-
ment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv-
ing:
Gearbox gearshift points
8
.
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
The Eco Coast
9
freewheel function is acti-
vated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
Some of the climate control system's set-
tings work at reduced power or are deacti-
vated.
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-
conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Selecting ECO mode
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, and it must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. The driver
display shows ECO when the function is acti-
vated.
With drive mode control*
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
Driving mode ECO in the
centre display's function view.
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Freewheel function Eco Coast
10
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac-
tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
reduced to idling speed with reduced consump-
tion.
The function is best used where it is possible to
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
lower speed limit.
8
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
9
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
10
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
404
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
Drive mode
Eco is activated.
The gear selector is in D position.
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
The driver display shows
COASTING when the
freewheel function is being used.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
The cruise control is activated.
The gear selector is moved from the D posi-
tion and the manual position.
The speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%.
Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*.
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti-
vate or switch off the function in order to use
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
able to do it in the safest way possible.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Move the gear selector to manual position.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
Change drive mode*, or switch off the
Driving mode ECO in the function view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel func-
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer
distances.
ECO gauge in the driver display
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
driving is:
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car under
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
the short pointer on the gauge.
Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display.
Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
405
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, ECO climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger com-
partment in order to reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
tings can be reset manually, but full function-
ality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting
Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press
the button for max. defroster which has normal
functionality.
Related information
Economical driving (p. 425)
Start/Stop (p. 396)
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
Level control* and shock absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regula-
ted automatically in the car.
With rear level control, the car maintains the
same height at the rear regardless of load. Level
control can also occur even after the car has
been parked.
Shock absorption (Four-C)
The shock absorption is adapted according to the
selected drive mode and according to the speed
of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for
the best possible comfort and is regulated con-
tinuously depending on the road surface, the
car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
Settings for level control
Deactivation of air suspension and level
control
In certain cases, the function must be deacti-
vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*.
The difference in level created by raising the car
with a jack can otherwise cause problems for the
air suspension.
Deactivating the function via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Change the damping level
11
Cars with active chassis (Four-C) and without the
drive mode function* can adjust the shock
absorption level via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Tap on
My Car Drive Mode
Suspension Control and select the level.
During transport
During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the air suspension may occur during
transport, which could affect the lashing nega-
tively.
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Loading (p. 227)
11
Depends on the car's equipment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
406
All-wheel drive
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time, which improves traction.
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent
wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto-
matically to the wheels with the best grip. The
system continuously calculates the need for tor-
que to the rear wheels, and can immediately
redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the
rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum trac-
tion during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode*.
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Low speed control (p. 414)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed
or prevent the car from rolling.
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car
is equipped with several automatic brake assist
functions. These can assist the driver by not
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following
auto braking functions are available:
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
Hold)
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)
Related information
Foot brake (p. 406)
Parking brake (p. 409)
Hill descent control (p. 415)
Hill start assist (p. 412)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 409)
Foot brake
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed
while driving.
Foot brake system
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
ing effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking
is most efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up. Use drive mode
Off Road for
increased engine braking while driving on steep
downhill gradients at low speeds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
407
Anti-lock braking system
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which prevent the wheels from
locking while braking and allows maintained
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
mal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
ically after the engine has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
matic test of the system may be made at low
speed. The test may be experienced as pulses in
the brake pedal.
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time in
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may
be delayed slightly when next using the brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking.
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
may extend braking distance. You should there-
fore maintain an extra large safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
Brake now and again to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
Gently depress the brake pedal after finish-
ing driving and before starting your next trip.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom-
mends only fitting brake linings that are approved
for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
has occurred in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake
system checked - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
408
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Brake assistance (p. 408)
Brake lights (p. 143)
Emergency brake lights (p. 408)
Emergency brake lights
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func-
tion means that the brake light flashes instead of
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
high speeds. After emergency braking to a low
speed, the brake lights return from flashing to the
normal constant glow. The car's hazard warning
flashers are activated at the same time. These
flash until the driver accelerates the car to a
higher speed again or switches off the hazard
warning flashers.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 406)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
Brake lights (p. 143)
Brake assistance
The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
System), helps to increase brake force during
braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where neces-
sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
function is suspended when the pressure on the
brake pedal decreases.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 406)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
409
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten-
sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat-
ically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli-
sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated auto-
matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti-
vated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
See also the sections "Rear Collision Warning"
and "Blind Spot Information".
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
Airbags (p. 63)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 340)
Blind Spot Information* (p. 340)
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
410
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Using the parking brake (p. 410)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 412)
Using the parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Applying the parking brake
1. Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage on the driver display.
Automatic application
The parking brake is applied automatically:
if the Auto Hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary approx. 5 minutes.
when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill
12
.
when the car has been switched off.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
12
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
411
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the car.
3. With automatic gearbox:
Select gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With manual gearbox:
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
Parking on a hill
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by pulling the control upwards while driving
the car away. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Settings for parking brake
Automatic activation of the parking brake is
selected via the centre display.
Automatic activation when the car is switched off:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
and deselect/select the func-
tion
Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
Parking brake (p. 409)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 412)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)
STARTING AND DRIVING
412
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
possible to release or apply the parking brake
after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
with the parking brake applied.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in
position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
manual gearbox.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con-
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the mes-
sage in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver dis-
play.
Message examples:
Parking brake Service required
Parking brake System overheated
Parking brake Temporarily unavailable
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Using the parking brake (p. 410)
Parking brake (p. 409)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 388)
Hill start assist
Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
the car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
vents the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)
STARTING AND DRIVING
413
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
Function
When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti-
vated automatically. The function can use either
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta-
tionary and it works on all gradients. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes
are released.
When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill
gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder
before releasing to ensure that the car does not
roll at all.
If the driver switches off the engine when the car
is stationary, the parking brake is applied.
Automatic deactivation
The function is deactivated automatically:
when the driver's door is open and the driv-
er's seatbelt is unfastened.
in gear position N
13
.
Switch for automatic brake
An indicator in the button illuminates when the function
is activated.
Activate or deactivate Auto Hold with the switch
in the tunnel console. The function remains deac-
tivated until it is reactivated.
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
When the function is deactivated, hill start assist
(HSA) remains active to prevent the car from roll-
ing backwards when starting on an uphill gradi-
ent.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the parking brake to
keep the car stationary.
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Hill start assist (p. 412)
13
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
414
Low speed control
The low speed control function Low Speed
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the
Off Road drive mode.
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel-
spin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
to facilitate traction and speed control at low
speed.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) which means that the
speed down steep downhill gradients can be
controlled with the accelerator pedal and it
reduces the need to use the brake pedal. The
system facilitates a low and even speed while
driving on steep downhill gradients.
Activating low speed control, LSC
The function is activated in different ways
depending on the car's equipment.
With drive mode control*
Select the
Off Road drive mode in order to
activate the function.
Select a different drive mode in order to
deactivate.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
low speed control with
Hill
Descent Control in the centre
display's function view.
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Hill descent control (p. 415)
Drive modes* (p. 400)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
415
Hill descent control
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced
engine braking. The function makes it possible
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the
Off Road drive mode.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv-
ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Function
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward, assis-
ted by the brake system. The speed can be
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are
switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed,
or stop the car at any time by using the foot
brake.
The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and
improves traction for driving off-road and on slip-
pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Activating hill descent control, HDC
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
The function is activated in different ways
depending on the car's equipment.
With drive mode control*
Select the
Off Road drive mode in order to
activate the function.
Select a different drive mode in order to
deactivate. If the drive mode is changed while
driving on a steep downhill gradient, the
braking effect will gradually decrease.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
low speed control with
Hill
Descent Control in the centre
display's function view.
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Points to remember when driving with HDC
With automatic gearbox
HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
gears despite the function not being deacti-
vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
416
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
Brake functions (p. 406)
Low speed control (p. 414)
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Driving in water
Driving in water means that the car is driven
through deep water on a water-covered road-
way. Driving in water must be carried out with
great caution.
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 30 cm at a maximum speed of
walking pace. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec-
tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the
air filter.
In depths greater than 30 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the lubri-
cating ability of the oils and shortens the
service life of these systems.
Damage to any component, engine, transmis-
sion, turbocharger, differential or its internal
components caused by flooding, hydrostatic
locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the
warranty.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do
not try restart - tow the car from the water to
a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information
Towing (p. 434)
Recovering the car (p. 435)
STARTING AND DRIVING
417
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Under special conditions, for example hard driv-
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat -
in particular with a heavy load.
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message
Engine temperature
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
down.
If the message
Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling
. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the rec-
ommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation given.
Related information
Driving with a trailer under special conditions
(p. 431)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 418)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
418
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni-
tion position II when the car is switched off.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, the message
12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter
power save mode is shown in the driver display.
The energy-saving function then shuts down cer-
tain functions or reduces certain functions such
as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Starter battery (p. 534)
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that:
the engine is working normally and that fuel
consumption is normal
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
all bulbs are working
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries
the wiper blades are in good condition.
Related information
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 573)
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)
Filling washer fluid (p. 533)
Winter driving (p. 419)
Economical driving (p. 425)
Settings for car modem* (p. 472)
Loading (p. 227)
Pilot Assist* (p. 304)
Speed limiter* (p. 277)
Speed camera information* (p. 350)
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
Driving in water (p. 416)
Alarm* (p. 262)
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 405)
Warning triangle (p. 504)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)
Spare wheel* (p. 502)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
419
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform cer-
tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
This mixture protects the engine against
frost erosion down to approximately –35 °C.
To avoid health risks, different types of glycol
must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con-
sumption while the engine is cold. Read
more about suitable oils in the section
"Adverse driving conditions for engine oil".
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
Slippery driving conditions
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
Topping up coolant (p. 522)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 569)
Starter battery (p. 534)
Winter wheels (p. 503)
Filling washer fluid (p. 533)
Replacing a wiper blade (p. 532)
Parking climate* (p. 206)
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 194)
Drive modes* (p. 400)
Foot brake (p. 406)
All-wheel drive (p. 406)
Electronic stability control (p. 273)
STARTING AND DRIVING
420
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
and refuelling
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to
be opened.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indi-
cates which side of the car the
fuel filler flap is located.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Refuelling at a petrol station
Refuelling is carried out as follows.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier
14
on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. See information
on approved fuels and the identifier in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec-
tively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open-
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Filling with a fuel can
15
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
Label
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area.
14
The identifier, in accordance with the CEN standard prEN16942, is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe.
15
Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
421
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
Handling of fuel (p. 421)
Petrol (p. 422)
Diesel (p. 423)
Handling of fuel
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
cal attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe-
thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten-
tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni-
ted.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Related information
Petrol (p. 422)
Diesel (p. 423)
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 420)
Economical driving (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
422
Petrol
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
The identifier
16
is located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be
on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at
filling stations throughout Europe.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
IMPORTANT
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
EN 228 E10 petrol (max
10 percent by volume ethanol) is
approved for use.
Ethanol higher than E10 (max.
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per-
mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel
with the highest possible octane rating is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel econ-
omy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
Handling of fuel (p. 421)
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 420)
16
In accordance with CEN standard prEN16942.
STARTING AND DRIVING
423
Diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
phur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier
17
is located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be
on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at
filling stations throughout Europe.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel
or moving between climate zones, paraffin precip-
itate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME
18
(B7).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME
19
and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Related information
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 424)
Diesel particulate filter (p. 424)
17
CEN standard prEN16942.
18
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
19
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
STARTING AND DRIVING
424
Empty tank and diesel engine
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check.
Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2.
Set the car in ignition position II - turn the
ignition dial to START without depressing
the brake pedal and hold the knob in the
START position for approx. 4 seconds. Then
release the knob, which automatically returns
to its starting position.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake pedal
and turn the ignition dial to START again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable
cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the
cover before filling can begin.
Related information
Diesel (p. 423)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 573)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel-driven cars are equipped with a particu-
late filter, which results in more efficient emis-
sion control.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected
in the filter during normal driving. So-called
"regeneration" is started in order to burn away
the particles and empty the filter. This requires
the engine to have reached normal operating
temperature.
Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a
little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con-
sumption may increase slightly during regenera-
tion.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full of
particles, a yellow warning triangle illuminates,
and the message
Particulate filter full See
Owner's manual is shown in the driver display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motorway.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
425
The car should then be driven for approximately
20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning text
is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
Related information
Diesel (p. 423)
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
tions.
For lower fuel consumption, activate ECO
drive mode.
Use the Eco Coast
20
freewheel function -
engine braking will cease and the car's
kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for
longer distances.
Drive in the highest gear
21
possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con-
sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
mise braking.
High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
Do not run the engine to operating tempera-
ture at idling speed, but rather drive with a
normal load right after starting - a cold
engine consumes more fuel than a warm
one.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Related information
Drive mode ECO (p. 403)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 573)
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
20
See the section "Drive mode ECO".
21
Applies to driving with manual gear changing.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
426
Towing bracket*
The car can be equipped with a towing bracket
that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer after
the car.
There may be different towing bracket variants
available for the car; contact a Volvo dealer for
more information.
For information on towing capacity and towball
load, see the section "Towing capacity and tow-
ball load".
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)
Towing bracket specifications* (p. 428)
Extendable/retractable towing brackets*
(p. 426)
Extendable/retractable towing
brackets*
The extendable/retractable towing hitch is
always easily accessible and simple to extend or
retract as needed. In the retracted position, the
towing hitch is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towing bracket carefully.
Extending the towing hitch
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
427
1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the right-
hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
with a constant orange glow for the exten-
sion function to be active.
2. Press and release the button - extension
might not start if the button is pressed for
too long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towing bracket.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension proce-
dure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it
is secured and locked in place - the indicator
lamp illuminates with a constant orange
glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while and
the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
ing the towing bracket.
If the car detects a connected trailer electri-
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
428
Retracting the towing hitch
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the tow-
ing bracket.
1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the but-
ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the
cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
> The towing bracket automatically lowers in
an unlocked position - the indicator lamp
in the button flashes orange.
2. Lock the towing bracket by moving it back to
its retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
a constant glow if the towing bracket is
correctly retracted.
Related information
Towing bracket* (p. 426)
Towing bracket specifications* (p. 428)
Towing bracket specifications*
Dimensions and mounting points for the towing
bracket.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
429
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 1204,1
B 80.5
C 875
D 437,5
E See the image above
F 286.2
G Ball centre
Related information
Towing bracket* (p. 426)
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of
points that are important to think about regar-
ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the
load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
load by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
for towing a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies with
the specified maximum towball load. Towball
load is calculated as part of the car's payload.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For more
information on tyre pressure, see the section
"Approved tyre pressures".
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
Follow the regulations in force for the permit-
ted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
The maximum trailer weights given only apply
to altitudes up to 1000 metres above sea
level. At higher altitudes, engine power and
thus the car's climbing ability is decreased
due to the reduced air density, and the maxi-
mum trailer weight must therefore be
reduced. The weight of the car and trailer
must be decreased by 10 % for each addi-
tional 1000 m (or part thereof).
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
430
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
Trailer weights
Information about Volvo's permitted trailer
weights is available in the article "Towing
capacity and towball load".
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
shows a symbol and a message. Other lamps on
the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before departure, see the heading "Check-
ing trailer lamps".
Symbol Message
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
broken, the driver display symbol for direction
indicators will also flash more quickly than nor-
mal.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi-
ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working
before starting off.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towing
bracket, the
Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check message is shown in the driver dis-
play.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be switched
off in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
431
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
possible to start the check manually.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours to
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Related information
Driving with a trailer under special conditions
(p. 431)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Towing bracket* (p. 426)
Driving with a trailer under special
conditions
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
In the event of overheating, a warning symbol illu-
minates in the driver display together with a mes-
sage, see section "Overheating in the engine and
drive system".
The following only applies to cars with automatic
gearbox.
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 417)
Low speed control (p. 414)
Using the parking brake (p. 410)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
432
Trailer Stability Assist*
The function of the trailer stability assist Trailer
Stability Assist (TSA) is to stabilise cars with
attached trailers in situations where they begin
snaking. The function is included in the stability
system ESC
22
.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer Stability Assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/
trailer combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been
gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi-
nation is stable once again, the system stops
regulating and the driver once again has full con-
trol of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre dis-
play.
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
tion the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
ing.
When trailer stability assist is
operating, the ESC symbol
flashes in the driver display.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
Driving with a trailer under special conditions
(p. 431)
Electronic stability control (p. 273)
22
Electronic Stability Control (Electronic stability control)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
433
Towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Front: Remove the cover.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark-
ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold
out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Tighten the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench*.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to
its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
434
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible.
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you
try to pull it up using the towing eye.
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Related information
Towing (p. 434)
Recovering the car (p. 435)
Towing
During towing, one vehicle pulls another vehicle
along behind it by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car.
NOTE
In ignition position II the steering lock is
deactivated if the car has been unlocked. See
section “Ignition position” for more informa-
tion.
4.
Set the car in ignition position II by turning
the ignition dial to START and holding the
ignition dial in the START position for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
5.
Move the gear selector to neutral position N
and release the parking brake.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km.
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
vated.
Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
435
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged dur-
ing attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
Warning triangle (p. 504)
Towing eye (p. 433)
Recovering the car (p. 435)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 388)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Recovering the car
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is
equipped with air suspension , this must be disa-
bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the
function via the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi-
cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Related information
Towing (p. 434)
Towing eye (p. 433)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
438
Audio and media
The audio and media system consists of media
player, radio and Bluetooth phone connection.
With an online car it is also possible to listen to
services via apps.
Functions can be controlled by voice command
or via the steering wheel keypad and the centre
display. The number of speakers and amplifiers
depends on which audio system the car is
equipped with.
Overview of audio and media.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is online there is the
option to download updates for optimal function-
ality, see the section "System updates" and
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Radio (p. 440)
Phone (p. 460)
Online car* (p. 467)
Apps (p. 438)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
Voice recognition (p. 115)
System updates (p. 513)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 474)
Apps
Applications (apps) facilitate access to some of
the car's services.
Application view.
Some basic apps are always available. When the
car is online it is possible to download more. The
apps that are available to download vary, but can
include Internet radio and music services.
Certain apps are only available for use if the car
is connected to the Internet.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
439
Tap on an app in the app view to launch it.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
Changing settings for apps (p. 178)
Audio settings
The audio system is preset for optimal sound
reproduction, but can be adapted according to
needs.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
Setting for optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Audio settings are described in the correspond-
ing section in the owner information. To access
the settings, open the top view and tap on
Settings Sound.
Active noise reduction*
Certain cars are equipped with an active noise
reduction function that suppresses engine noise
in the passenger compartment via the audio sys-
tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-
tive noise and the audio system outputs anti-
noise in order to dampen the noise.
Microphones in the car's roof.
NOTE
Do not cover the car's microphones; other-
wise a rumbling sound from the audio system
may be produced.
Related information
Audio settings for media (p. 452)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 117)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
Audio and media (p. 438)
Online car* (p. 467)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
440
Radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
online it is also possible to listen to Internet
radio.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
Changing and searching radio stations
(p. 440)
Digital radio (p. 444)
RDS radio (p. 443)
Online car* (p. 467)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Media player (p. 446)
Changing and searching radio
stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list of
the radio stations within the area that are trans-
mitting the strongest signals.
Starting the radio
1.
Open the app (e.g.
FM) from the app view.
2. Select station.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
441
Changing lists within the frequency
band
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Select playback from
Stations, Favourites,
Genres or Ensembles
1
.
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
Favourites — only plays back selected favourite
channels, see heading “Favourites” below.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast-
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
Press on < > under the centre display or the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
When a favourite is saved from a list, the radio
will automatically search for the best frequency.
But if a favourite is saved from a manual station
search, the radio does not automatically change
to a stronger frequency.
To choose among favourites within the frequency
band, see the heading “Changing lists within the
frequency band” above. To choose from among
all favourites, see the heading “Radio Favourites”
below.
Tap on to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
Radio Favourites
Radio Favourites shows saved
favourites from all frequency
bands.
1.
Open the app
Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
1
Only applies to digital radio (DAB).
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
442
Changing radio band
Tap on the app (such as FM) from app view,
or open the app menu with the right-hand
steering wheel keypad and select from there.
Searching for radio stations
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
AM — station and frequency.
FM — station, genre and frequency.
DAB - ensembles and stations.
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input of
a character and the search results are
shown by category.
Manual tuning
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
longer changes frequency automatically when
reception is poor.
Tap on Manual tuning, pull the control or
tap on < > to the desired frequency.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
443
Related information
Radio (p. 440)
Digital radio (p. 444)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
RDS radio
With RDS (Radio Data System) the radio can
automatically change to the strongest transmit-
ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM
transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
gramme types or traffic information.
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when the
set programme type is no longer broadcast. To
go back earlier, press
on the right-hand
steering wheel keypad or tap
Cancel in the cen-
tre display.
Related information
Radio (p. 440)
Settings for radio (p. 445)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
444
Digital radio
Digital radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting, DAB)
is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The
radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB (Digital
Multimedia Broadcasting).
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the
centre display.
Digital radio plays back in the same way as FM
and AM, see section "Changing and searching
for radio stations". Besides the options to select
playback from
Stations, Favourites and
Genres, there is also the option to select play-
back from subchannels and Ensembles. An
ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel
group) broadcasting on the same frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named sub-
channels. These are temporary and can contain
e.g. translations of the main programme into
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with
an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information
Changing and searching radio stations
(p. 440)
Linking between different radio bands FM
and DAB (p. 444)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Radio (p. 440)
Settings for radio (p. 445)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
Linking between different radio
bands FM and DAB
The function enables the digital radio to switch
from a channel with poor or no reception to the
same channel in another channel group (ensem-
ble) with better reception, within DAB and/or
between DAB and FM.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Media DAB.
3.
Tick/untick
DAB To DAB Handover and/or
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
Digital radio (p. 444)
Radio (p. 440)
Settings for radio (p. 445)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
445
Settings for radio
Settings for the different radio bands.
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in the
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
on
Cancel in the centre display.
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band. Activating/
deactivating functions.
AM/FM
Show Broadcast Information — shows
information on programme content, artists,
etc.
Freeze Program Name — select to stop
the programme service name from scrolling
continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 sec-
onds.
News - interrupts the current media play-
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre-
vious media source is resumed when the
news broadcast is finished.
Traffic Announcements - interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts infor-
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the
message is finished.
Local Interruptions — interrupts the cur-
rent media playback and broadcasts informa-
tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh-
bourhood. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
The
Local Interruptions function is a geo-
graphically restricted version of the Traffic
Announcements function. The Traffic
Announcements function must be acti-
vated at the same time.
Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
DAB
Sort Services - selection for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
service number.
DAB To DAB Handover - starts the func-
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a
radio channel is lost, another channel is
found automatically in another channel group
(ensemble).
DAB To FM Handover - starts the function
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative fre-
quency is searched for automatically.
Select Announcements — select the
types of messages to be received while DAB
is playing. Selected messages will interrupt
the current media playback to play back the
message. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
Traffic Flash — receives information about
traffic disruptions.
News Flash — receives news.
Transport Flash — receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
Warning/Services — receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
Show Broadcast Information — select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
Show Program Related Images — select
whether or not to show images for pro-
grammes on the screen.
Related information
Radio (p. 440)
Digital radio (p. 444)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
446
Media player
The media player can play back audio from
CDs* and externally connected audio sources
via the AUX/USB input or wirelessly stream
audio files from external devices via Bluetooth.
Video can be watched from USB connected
devices. In an Online connected car, it is possi-
ble to listen to Internet radio, audiobooks and
music services via apps.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
The media player is controlled
from the centre display, but
several functions can be con-
trolled from the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad or
by voice recognition control.
Related information
Media playback (p. 447)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Apps (p. 438)
Radio (p. 440)
CD player* (p. 450)
Media via Bluetooth (p. 451)
Media via AUX/USB input (p. 451)
video (p. 452)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
447
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre
display. Several functions can also be controlled
from the right keypad on the steering wheel or
with voice recognition.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the app
CD from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Mp3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1. Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB, AUX) from the
app view.
> Playback begins.
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
4.
Open the app
Bluetooth from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Internet media
1. Connecting the car.
2. Open the app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Controlling and changing media
The media player can be oper-
ated by voice recognition, from
the steering wheel keypad or
the centre display.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
448
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
display or press
on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad in order to increase or
decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
song being played, the button under the centre
display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
the centre display, press on under the cen-
tre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
and hold
depressed under the centre dis-
play or on the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
Changing media - select under Recent sources
in the app, and in the app view, tap on the
desired app, or select using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to play back from the
library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the play-
back order.
Similar - tap on the button in order to use
Gracenote to search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a playlist from it. The
playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs.
Change device - tap on the button in order to
switch between USB devices when several are
connected.
Settings for video
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing
Settings
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Playing back DivX
®
This DivX Certified
®
device must be registered in
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap
Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Related information
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Apps (p. 438)
Searching media (p. 450)
Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 451)
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
(p. 452)
CD player* (p. 450)
Radio (p. 440)
Gracenote
®
(p. 449)
video (p. 452)
Audio settings for media (p. 452)
TV* (p. 453)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
449
Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during
playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music rec-
ognition.
Activate/deactivate Gracenote
On activation, Gracenote data replace the original
data.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Media Gracenote®.
3. Activate/deactivate Gracenote by ticking/
unticking the box for Gracenote®.
4. Select settings for activated Gracenote data:
Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is upda-
ted continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and down-
load, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Media playback (p. 447)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 474)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
450
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
(titles), album, video, audiobook, playlist and,
when the car is online, podcasts (digital media
via Internet).
1.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms.
3.
Press
Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Media playback (p. 447)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Online car* (p. 467)
CD player*
The media player can play back CD discs with
audio files. See technical specifications for sup-
ported formats.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
Media playback (p. 447)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Media player (p. 446)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
451
Media via Bluetooth
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play streaming
audio files from external devices with Bluetooth,
such as mobile phones and PDAs.
Related information
Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 451)
Media playback (p. 447)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Media player (p. 446)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
Connecting media via Bluetooth
Connect a Bluetooth device with the car in order
to stream media and use as Internet connection
if it is available.
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone.
Related information
Connect phone (p. 461)
Media via Bluetooth (p. 451)
Media playback (p. 447)
Media player (p. 446)
Media via AUX/USB input
An external media source, e.g. an iPod or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system.
A media source with rechargeable batteries is
recharged when connected via USB and when
the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is run-
ning.
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only
store compatible formats on it. It takes a lot
longer for the system to load storage media that
contains anything other than compatible formats.
In addition to audio, the media player also sup-
ports video playback when the device is con-
nected via USB.
Some MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system.
Related information
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
(p. 452)
Media playback (p. 447)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Media player (p. 446)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
video (p. 452)
Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
452
Connecting media via AUX/USB
input
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
any of the connectors in the tunnel console. The
cable must be routed out in the front to avoid
being trapped when the hatch is closed.
In the cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port must be
used for connecting a phone when it will be used
for Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
Related information
Media playback (p. 447)
Media via AUX/USB input (p. 451)
Media player (p. 446)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
video
Video from a USB-connected device can be
played back with the media player.
There will be no picture when the car is moving,
but the audio continues to be played back. The
picture returns when the car is stationary.
See section "Technical specifications for media"
for supported video formats.
Related information
Media playback (p. 447)
Media player (p. 446)
Technical specifications for media (p. 459)
Audio settings for media
Personalisation of audio settings for media play-
back.
Audio mode that recreates the acoustics from Gothen-
burg Concert Hall.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound and select settings:
Sound Experience* — more audio play-
back options, e.g. playback with concert
hall feel. Settings replace any selections
made in accordance with the points below
for audio settings.
Tone — personal settings for bass, treble,
equaliser, etc.
Balance - balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
453
System volumes for media
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Sound System Volumes:
AUX - If an external audio source (e.g. an
MP3 player or iPod) is connected to the
AUX input then the audio source that is
connected can have a different volume
than the audio system's internal volume
(e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the
volume of the input. If the volume is too
high or too low then the quality of the
sound can be impaired.
Speed and Volume Compensation -
the audio system compensates for dis-
rupting noises in the passenger compart-
ment by increasing the volume in relation
to the speed of the car. Compensation
level can be set.
Related information
Audio settings (p. 439)
Media player (p. 446)
TV*
2
The TV picture is only shown when the car is
stationary. There will be no picture when the car
is moving, but the audio continues to be played
back. The picture returns once more when the
car is almost or completely stationary.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev-
eral functions can also be controlled from the
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition.
Related information
Using the TV* (p. 453)
Using the TV*
3
Start the TV
1.
Open the app
TV from the app view.
2. Select a channel.
Change or search for TV channels
The TV automatically searches for the channels
with best reception.
Change the list of visible channels
1.
Press
Library
2.
Select playback from
TV-channels,
Favourites or Genres.
3. Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
Press on <> under the centre display or on
the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a Favourite:
Tap on in order to add/remove a chan-
nel to/from the favourites list.
2
Applies to certain markets.
3
Applies to certain markets.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
454
TV guide
A programme guide is available with information
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
Tap on Guide to show information about TV
programmes.
NOTE
If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
from city to city, it is not certain that
Favourites are available since the frequency
may have changed.
Change the format of the TV picture
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
shown in.
1.
Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
2.
Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with-
out cropping.
Settings for TV
The option to make certain settings is available,
both in the top view or when TV-viewing takes
place in full screen mode.
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing
Settings
Media TV, the following can be adjusted:
Subtitle Language
Audio Language
NOTE
The system only supports TV broadcasts in
the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or
MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2
standard. The system does not support ana-
logue broadcasts.
Related information
TV* (p. 453)
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 118)
Media playback (p. 447)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 474)
Apple CarPlay*
Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions, send/
receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay
focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works
with selected Apple devices.
If the car is not already equipped with
Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after-
wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install
Apple CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
Using apps that are not compatible with
Apple CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between an iPhone and the car is
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible
for the content in Apple CarPlay.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
455
When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display.
The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
centre display, mobile phone or with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain
functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled
using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel
button
starts voice control using Siri and a
short press activates the car's own voice control.
If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel
button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 455)
Using Apple CarPlay*
To use Apple CarPlay, Siri voice control must be
activated in your phone.
Connecting iPhone to Apple CarPlay
NOTE
Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth
is deactivated. A phone or media player con-
nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore
not be available when CarPlay is active. An
alternative Internet source must be used to
connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use
Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is started according to the follow-
ing, only after an iPhone has been connected.
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the subview with
Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible
apps are shown.
2. If the subview with Apple CarPlay is not
opened, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app
view.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the
Apple CarPlay icon in the app view.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
456
Switch the connection between
Apple CarPlay and iPod
Apple CarPlay to iPod
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Apple CarPlay.
3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
no longer start Apple CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB input.
5.
Open the app
iPod from the app view.
iPod to Apple CarPlay
1.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB input.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Media playback (p. 447)
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
(p. 452)
Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 456)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Settings for Apple CarPlay*
Settings for phone connected as Apple CarPlay.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Apple CarPlay
and select setting:
Tick the box - Apple CarPlay starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
Untick the box - Apple CarPlay does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset is required in order to delete the
list, see the section "Resetting settings in the
settings view".
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
Related information
Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
457
Android Auto*
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and use
programs from an Android device. Android Auto
works with selected Android devices.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on the
website: www.android.com/auto/. Please note
that Volvo is not responsible for the content in
Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
Android Auto has been started once, the applica-
tion will be started automatically the next time the
device is connected. Automatic start can be
deactivated under settings.
NOTE
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
another media player. Bluetooth is active
while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display.
The Android Auto apps can be controlled via the
centre display, a mobile phone, or with the steer-
ing wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain
functions). It is also possible to control
Android Auto using voice control so that you can
focus on the road. A long press on the steering
wheel button
starts voice recognition control
and a short press deactivates.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Starting Android Auto
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect the Android to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Android Auto in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
458
Previously connected Android
1. Connect the phone to the USB input.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the subview with Android Auto
is opened and compatible apps are
shown.
2.
If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the
Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Media playback (p. 447)
Connecting media via AUX/USB input
(p. 452)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 458)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for a phone that has been connected
the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Android Auto
and select setting:
Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset is required in order to delete the
list, see the section "Resetting settings in the
settings view".
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 457)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
459
Technical specifications for media
Compatible file formats, audio specifications
and USB.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, m4v
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
MKV .mkv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX certified devices have been tested for high-
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution 720x576
Bit rate 4.8Mbps
Frame rate 30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater pro-
file. Visit divx.com for more
information and software
tools to convert your files
into DivX Home Theater
video.
Storage on USB device
In order for the system to read the USB device
correctly, the following specifications must be fol-
lowed. No folder structure will be shown in the
centre display during playback.
Max number
Files 15000
Folders 1000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Items in a playlist 1000
Subfolders No limit
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
460
Technical specification for USB
connector
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
Media player (p. 446)
Media playback (p. 447)
Phone
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be
connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-
free system.
The audio and media system acts as a handsfree,
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the mobile phone's functions. The mobile phone
can still be operated with its own keys if it is con-
nected to the car.
When a mobile phone has been connected with
the car and connected, it can be used make calls,
send/receive messages, stream media and pro-
vide an Internet connection.
The phone is operated from the
centre display, but some opera-
tions are also available via voice
recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel key-
pad.
Overview
Microphone.
Mobile phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice rec-
ognition.
Driver display.
Related information
Connect phone (p. 461)
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 462)
Managing phone calls (p. 463)
Managing text messages (p. 465)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
461
Settings for text messages (p. 467)
Bluetooth settings (p. 467)
Voice recognition (p. 115)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Media player (p. 446)
Connect phone
Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car
to make calls, send/receive messages, stream
media and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con-
nected at once, in which case one of them can
only be streaming media. The most recently con-
nected phone will automatically be connected to
make calls, send/receive messages, stream
media and provide an Internet connection. To
change the use of the phone, see section
"Bluetooth settings".
Connection is performed once per device. After
connection, the Bluetooth device no longer
needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to
have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to
the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti-
vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected
Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
3. Open the subview for phone.
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
list is updated as new devices are
detected.
4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
5. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the phone. In which case,
choose to accept in both places.
6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
The message function must be activated
in some phones.
Not all mobile phones are compatible and
can show contacts and messages in the
car.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
462
Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
5. Select the name of the car on the phone.
6. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the external device. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
The message function must be activated
in some phones.
Not all mobile phones are compatible and
can show contacts and messages in the
car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In which
case, delete the phone from the car and then
connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 462)
Bluetooth settings (p. 467)
Managing phone calls (p. 463)
Managing text messages (p. 465)
Online car* (p. 467)
Connecting/disconnecting the
phone
Connect, change or disconnect a connected
phone.
Connecting the phone automatically
It is only the two last connected phones that can
be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set-
ting the car in ignition position I.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2.
Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Connect the phone manually
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2. Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
> The phone will connect.
Disconnecting the phone
Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
463
When the phone is out of range of the car it is
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call then the call can be
continued on the phone.
Changing phones
1. Open the subview for phone.
2.
Press
Change .
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Removing a phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
2.
Press
Settings Communication
Bluetooth Devices.
> A list of connected Bluetooth devices is
displayed.
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
4.
Tap on
Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The phone is no longer connected with
the car.
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Connect phone (p. 461)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
Bluetooth settings (p. 467)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Online car* (p. 467)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Making phone calls
1. Open the subview for phone.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
464
2. Select call from: call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on
in the contact list in order to
add a contact under
Favourites.
3.
Tap on
Call or .
4.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via the
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad .
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Press
Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4.
Tap on
Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5.
Tap on
End call to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1.
Tap on
Join calls to merge the active multi-
party call.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
play and the centre display. Manage the call on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
centre display.
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
Private call
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the call
continues on your mobile phone.
Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off
and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
465
Managing text messages
Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth-
connected phone.
On certain phones the message function must be
activated. Not all mobiles are fully compatible and
capable of displaying contacts and messages in
the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Reading a text message in the centre
display
1.
In app view, tap on
Messages to open it.
2.
Press
Read out to have the message read
out, or press on the message you would like
read.
Reading a new text message in the
driver display
A text message is only shown in the driver display
if the option is selected, see section "Settings for
text messages".
To have the message read out - select Read
out using the steering wheel keypad.
Send text message
1.
In app view, tap on
Messages to open it.
2.
Reply to message — tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then
tap on
Answer.
Create a new message — tap on
Create
new
+. Select a contact or enter a
number.
3. Compose the message.
4.
Press
Send.
Message notification
For notification settings, see section "Settings for
text messages".
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Settings for text messages (p. 467)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
466
Managing the phone book
Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Browse between the letters and to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are sorted
under
. The sort order can be made by first or
last name, see the section "Settings for phone"
for more information.
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 118)
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 105)
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
Settings for phone
Settings for connected phone.
Phone
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Phone and
select settings:
Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
to use a ringtone from the phone or the
car. Some phones are not fully compatible
and their ringtones may therefore not be
available for use in the car. For compatibil-
ity, see support.volvocars.com.
Sort order for contacts - select sort
order of contact list.
For call notifications in the head-up display*,
see section "Head-up display".
Related information
Settings for text messages (p. 467)
Bluetooth settings (p. 467)
Phone (p. 460)
Connect phone (p. 461)
Head-up display* (p. 112)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
467
Settings for text messages
Settings for text messages on connected phone.
Message
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
Notification in centre display - shows
message notifications in the centre dis-
play's status bar.
Notification in driver display - shows
notifications in the driver display. When
notifications in the driver display are
active, it is possible to manage incoming
messages with the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad.
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text message.
Related information
Phone (p. 460)
Connect phone (p. 461)
Managing text messages (p. 465)
Settings for phone (p. 466)
Bluetooth settings
Settings for Bluetooth-connected phone.
Bluetooth
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select settings:
Previously paired devices - lists con-
nected devices.
Remove device - removes the connected
device.
Allowed services for this device - phone
usage options: calling, sending/receiving
messages, streaming media and as Internet
connection.
Internet connection - option for connecting
the car to the Internet via the device's
Bluetooth connection.
Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Phone (p. 460)
Connect phone (p. 461)
Media player (p. 446)
Online car*
An online car provides the ability to use e.g.
Internet radio and music services via apps as
well as contact dealers in the car and download
software.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
the car's built-in modem*.
When the car is connected to the Internet, its
Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be
shared to allow other devices to use the Internet
connection
4
.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
4
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
468
Related information
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Apps (p. 438)
Book service and repair (p. 510)
System updates (p. 513)
Volvo ID (p. 23)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)
Connecting the car
Connect the car to the phone via Bluetooth,
Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.
The mobile phone and network operator must
support tethering (sharing the Internet connec-
tion) and the plan must include data.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
ther charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or car modem*.
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com before connecting.
Connecting with Bluetooth
See Connecting a phone.
Connecting with Wi-Fi
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) on the mobile phone.
2.
Press
Settings in top view.
3.
Press
Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Wi-Fi.
5. Tap on the network name of the network to
be connected.
6. Enter the network password.
7. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been discon-
nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
is used.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
469
When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con-
nected phones are deleted. To show the list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, press
Settings Wi-Fi Saved
networks
.
For network connection requirements, see the
section “Technology and security for Wi-Fi”.
Connecting with car modem*
5
When the car is connected to the Internet via the
car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
connection.
1.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under
the cargo area floor.
2.
Press
Settings in top view.
3.
Press
Communication Car Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for
Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Connect phone (p. 461)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 471)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 471)
No or poor connection (p. 470)
Settings for car modem* (p. 472)
Bluetooth settings (p. 467)
Apple CarPlay* (p. 454)
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is connected to the Internet, its
Internet connection can be shared to allow other
devices to use the Internet connection.
6
The network operator (SIM card) must support
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
5
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
470
2.
Press
Communication Car Wi-Fi
Hotspot
.
3.
Tap on
Network name and name the
shared connection.
4.
Tap on
Password and select a password to
be entered on connecting devices.
5.
Tap on
Frequency band and select the fre-
quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
nection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
Press
Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 471)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
No or poor connection (p. 470)
No or poor connection
Factors affecting the network.
The amount of data transferred is dependent on
the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
signal strength.
Mobile phone to car
The speed of the connection may vary depending
on the location of the mobile phone in the car.
Move the mobile phone handset closer to the
centre display in order to increase the signal
strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter-
ference in between.
Mobile phone to network
The speed of the mobile network varies depend-
ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tun-
nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agree-
ment you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, con-
tact your network operator.
6
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
471
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the connection then it
may help to restart the phone.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
3.
Tap on
Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the net-
work in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
user data and system settings are reset to origi-
nal factory settings.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Resetting settings in the settings view
(p. 173)
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz
7
.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced perform-
ance.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Connecting the car (p. 468)
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)
No or poor connection (p. 470)
7
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
472
Settings for car modem*
8
The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
possible to share the Internet connection via
Wi-Fi.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Car Modem
Internet
and select settings:
Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
Network
Select network operator
- automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
net when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
vider in your home country.
SIM card PIN
Change PIN
- a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 469)
Downloading, updating and
uninstalling apps
When the car is online there is the option to
download new apps, keep existing apps upda-
ted or uninstall apps.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
The apps are managed via
Download Centre in applica-
tion view.
To be able to download, update
or uninstall apps, the car must
be online.
Downloading an app
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
8
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
473
3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order
to expand in the list and get more informa-
tion about the app.
4.
Select
Install in order to start the download
and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installa-
tion is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot
be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
Cancelling a download
Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled —
installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Updating apps
If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Update all
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Install all.
> Updating is started.
Update some
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Install.
> Updating is started.
Uninstalling an app
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis-
appears from the list.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Radio (p. 440)
Media player (p. 446)
System updates (p. 513)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
474
License agreement for audio and
media
A license is an agreement granting a right to
conduct some activity or to make use of another
person's right under the terms and conditions of
the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's
agreements with manufacturers/developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
Dirac Unison
®
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logotypes
are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
used under licence.
This DivX Certified
®
device can play back DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete the registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote
®
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
475
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun-
tries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online
servers or embedded databases (together called
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data
in accordance with the intended end-user func-
tions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote
software and Gracenote servers for your own
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote
software or any Gracenote data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-
note servers will be terminated if you violate
these restrictions. If your license is terminated
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers.
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
will under no circumstances have any obligation
to pay you for any information you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
pany's rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur-
pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui-
ries without knowing anything about who you are.
Additional information is available on the web
page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
note service.
The Gracenote software and everything included
in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is".
Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran-
ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv-
ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote servers or to change data
categories for any reason that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace-
note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free
or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption. Grace-
note has no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
company reserves the right to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
476
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
477
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
478
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity for
Bluetooth
®
module
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
479
Country/
Area
EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Type of equipment: Audio Navigation Unit
Hereby, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation declares that this Audio Navigation Unit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EG.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
480
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备,必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
481
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
기기는 가정용(B ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 󸭥적으로 하며, 󸭤든
지역에서 사용할 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 없습니다.
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
482
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
483
Country/
Area
Mexico:
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
Related information
Audio and media (p. 438)
Media player (p. 446)
Online car* (p. 467)
Gracenote
®
(p. 449)
Sensus - connection and maintenance
(p. 29)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
484
Terms and conditions for services
and Customer Privacy Policy
Read the terms and conditions for services and
the Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo is committed to offering you the absolute
best services to ensure that it is as safe, comfort-
able and pleasant as possible for you to drive
your Volvo. Volvo offers a wide range of services,
from assistance in emergency situations to navi-
gation in various infotainment services.
Read these terms and conditions ("Service Terms
and Conditions") carefully before using the serv-
ices - support.volvocars.com.
Customer Privacy Policy
This policy applies for the processing of customer
data and personal data. The purpose of the policy
is to provide our existing, previous and prospec-
tive customers with a general understanding of:
The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
The types of personal data we gather.
The reasons we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 474)
License agreement for the driver display
(p. 99)
Type approval for radar units (p. 323)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
486
Tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
nal tyres that have the VOL
1
marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there-
fore important that the new tyres also have this
marking in order for the car's driving characteris-
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main-
tained.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially impor-
tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 0715. The tyre in the
figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2015.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam-
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discoloration.
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con-
dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
and rear wheels can be switched with each other.
A suitable distance for the first change is approx.
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work-
shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer-
tain about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under-
steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
ding to one side, resulting in possible complete
loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
1
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
487
Storage
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying
down or hanging up - never standing up.
Related information
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 487)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 488)
Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)
Tyres' rotation direction
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
WHEELS AND TYRES
488
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in
height with the tread wear indicators. Change to
new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip
in rain and snow.
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
Checking the tyre pressures
Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv-
ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of
the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu-
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate
tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short-
ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving
characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure
that is too low could result in the tyres overheat-
ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects
travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac-
teristics.
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
pressures the tyres should have at different loads
and speed conditions.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
comfort are desired.
Checking the air pressure
1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out
the check on cold tyres, which means that
the tyres should have the same temperature
as the outside temperature. After several few
kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and
the pressure increases.
2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure
corresponds with the approved tyre pressure
in accordance with the tyre pressure label.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
489
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 491)
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Tyre monitoring*
The tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
If the symbol first flashes for approximately one
minute and then changes to a constant glow, it
may indicate that the system cannot detect or
warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Symbol Specification
The symbol illuminates in the
event of low tyre pressure.
The symbol flashes for approxi-
mately one minute and then
changes over to illuminating
with a constant glow in the
event of a fault in the ITPMS
system.
System description
ITPMS measures differences in rotation speed
between the different wheels via the ABS system
in order to be able to determine whether they
have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pres-
sure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed
and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com-
paring the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have pres-
sure that is too low.
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
display and a message is shown, see also the
heading "Message in the driver display" below.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
490
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys-
tem is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre
should be cold and have the air pressure recom-
mended by the car manufacturer specified on the
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If
the car has tyres of a different size than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what
the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air
pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life,
and can affect car handling and stopping ability.
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system
fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym-
bol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
will flash for about one minute and then remain
illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea-
sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
with TPMS.
Messages in the driver display
The following messages may be shown when the
indicator symbol is illuminated:
Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
after fill
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
Tyre pressure system Service required.
If the system cannot determine which tyre has
low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the
centre display.
To bear in mind
Always calibrate the system after a wheel
change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres-
sures.
The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
There is no option to deactivate ITPMS.
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 491)
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 492)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
491
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre
monitoring system*
With the system for tyre monitoring, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pres-
sure status can be viewed in the centre display.
Checking status
1.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
2.
Tap on
Status to show the status of the
tyres.
Status indication
The graphics show the status for each tyre.
Status view
2
.
Green tyre:
The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
a warning.
Yellow tyre:
The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as
possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pres-
sure has been adjusted.
All tyres yellow:
The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures as
soon as possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the
tyre pressures have been adjusted.
All tyres grey:
Calibration in progress.
Unknown status.
Several minutes driving above 30 km/h (20 mph)
may be required for the system to become active.
All tyres grey and a message:
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact an
authorised Volvo workshop (recommended).
Related information
Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 492)
Car status (p. 510)
2
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
492
Rectifying low tyre pressure with
tyre monitoring*
When the tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for ITPMS is
illuminated and the message
Tyre
pressure low is shown. Calibrate
ITPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with
a tyre pressure gauge.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver's side.
3. Recalibrate the ITPMS system, see the sec-
tion "Calibrating tyre monitoring".
4. In some cases, it may be necessary to drive
the car for a few minutes at a speed above
30 km/h (20 mph) in order to extinguish the
ITPMS symbol and clear the message.
Note that the ITPMS symbol does not extin-
guish until the low tyre pressure has been
rectified and new calibration has been per-
formed.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 491)
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 493)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
493
Calibrating tyre monitoring*
In order for the Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference
value for the tyre pressure must be determined.
This must be performed each time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is changed.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol-
lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver's side.
3. Start the engine.
4.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
5.
Tap on
Status to view tyre monitoring.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Press
Calibrate.
7.
Tap on
OK to confirm that the tyre pressure
in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the car.
Calibration is performed while the car is driv-
ing. Calibration is interrupted temporarily if
the engine is switched off, but is resumed
automatically when the car is driven again.
> When sufficient data has been collected
to enable the system to detect low tyre
pressure, the tyres in the centre display
change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirma-
tion that the calibration is complete.
If calibration fails, a message is shown:
Calibration unsuccessful. Please try
again..
NOTE
Remember that the TPMS system must be
recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
pressure is adjusted. New reference values
must be stored for the system to work cor-
rectly.
Related information
Tyre monitoring* (p. 489)
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 491)
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 492)
WHEELS AND TYRES
494
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture as
well as to check and adjust the air pressure.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively
seals tyres punctured in the tread.
The puncture repair kit has limited capacity to
seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do
not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Sealing fluid bottle
Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the
expiration date has passed and after use. Treat
the old bottle as environmentally hazardous
waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested.
Could result in allergic reaction in the
event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
WARNING
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
ately with soap and plenty of water.
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
should be examined by a doctor.
Related information
Using the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 495)
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 498)
Tyres (p. 486)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
495
Using the emergency puncture
repair kit
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Overview
Electrical cable
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
Connecting
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the com-
pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0, and
locate the electrical cable and the air hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
496
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot-
tle holder.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
WARNING
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately
with soap and plenty of water.
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be
examined by a doctor.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
ing.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Contacting an authorised tyre cen-
tre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
497
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres-
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres-
sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve
if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
tance should be at least two metres.
15.
Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-
ficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified in accordance with the tyre
pressure label on the driver side door pil-
lar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre
pressure is too high.
17. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified in accordance
with the tyre pressure label.
3. Switch off the compressor.
18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the
protective cap on the air hose and fold the
hose in the box.
Place TMK in the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
498
19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection
of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it
needs to be replaced.
Related information
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)
Inflate tyres with the compressor
from the emergency puncture repair
kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in
the air hose valve connection to the bottom
of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the engine.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
499
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side door
pillar. (Release air using the pressure reduc-
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Related information
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 494)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
When changing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel.
Follow the relevant instructions for removing and
fitting wheels.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 499)
Fitting the wheels (p. 501)
Tool kit (p. 504)
Winter wheels (p. 503)
Spare wheel* (p. 502)
Wheel bolts (p. 502)
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when chang-
ing wheels.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with
Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension, this
must be disabled before the car is raised
with a jack*.
Deactivate the function via the top view of
the centre display by pressing
Settings
My Car Suspension and selecting
Disable Leveling Control.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
500
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is
free from dirt.
3.
Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
blocks or large stones for example.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* to the stop position.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed all the way
into the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench*.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground
and the jack, nor between the jack and the
car's jacking point.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
8. When raising the car, it is important that the
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody. The triangle
markings in the plastic cover indicate the
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There
are two jacking points on each side of the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each
point.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
501
Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact
with the car's jacking point. Check that the
head of the jack is correctly positioned in the
jacking point so that the bump in the centre
of the head fits into the jacking point hole
and the base is positioned vertically below
the jacking point. Also make sure you turn
the jack so that the crank is as far away from
the side of the car as possible, at which point
the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
direction of the car.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 499)
Raise the car (p. 516)
Fitting the wheels (p. 501)
Tool kit (p. 504)
Fitting the wheels
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
wheels.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor-
tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop-
erly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the tighten-
ing torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 499)
When changing wheels (p. 499)
Spare wheel* (p. 502)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
502
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the
hubs.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may
damage the nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 499)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
mal wheel.
The illustration is schematic - the shape of the foam
block may vary depending on car model.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the foam
block. The foam block contains all tools for
changing a wheel, see the section "Tool kit".
The car's handling may be altered by the use of
the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be
replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The spare wheel is smaller than the regular
wheel, which will affect the car's ground clear-
ance. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car.
Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre
pressure for the spare wheel.
On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear
axle can be disconnected.
If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, it
is not possible to use snow chains at the
same time.
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
Storing the punctured tyre
1. Put the tools back in the foam block and lift
the foam block back into the car.
2. Screw in the foam block using the mounting
screws and then fold down the cargo area
floor.
3. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
503
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 499)
Fitting the wheels (p. 501)
Tool kit (p. 504)
Jack* (p. 505)
Winter wheels
Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
ditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions greater than
18 inches.
Mounting instructions are supplied with Volvo
original snow chains.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious dam-
age to the car and lead to an accident.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 499)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
504
Tool kit
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
area.
The foam block under the cargo area floor con-
tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
jack* and wheel wrench* are included, as well as
a package* with disposable gloves and a bag for
the damaged tyre.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 499)
Jack* (p. 505)
Warning triangle (p. 504)
First aid kit (p. 505)
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located under the panel
on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
and then unhooking the panel. Place the
panel to one side.
Open the latch and take out the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
Tool kit (p. 504)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 143)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
505
Jack*
Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
wheel.
Only use the original jack when fitting a spare
wheel or when changing between summer and
winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be
well greased.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
Applies to cars with level control*
If the car is equipped with air suspension then
this must be deactivated before the car is raised
with the jack.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1.
Press on
Settings in the top view:
2.
Press
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Related information
Tool kit (p. 504)
Raise the car (p. 516)
First aid kit
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit in the space on the right-
hand side in the cargo area.
Related information
Tool kit (p. 504)
WHEELS AND TYRES
506
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
18 Rim diameter in inches
50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)
Dimension designation for tyre
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
235/55 R18 104 V.
235 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
104 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres. The lowest
permitted load index is specified in a load index
table.
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum per-
mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The
only exception to these regulations is winter
tyres
3
, where a lower speed rating may be used.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which
the car can be driven depends on road condi-
tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win-
ter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
3
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WHEELS AND TYRES
507
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
table, "Load index and speed rating". If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
Tyres (p. 486)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Load index and speed rating (p. 576)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
510
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and mainte-
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 524)
Book service and repair (p. 510)
Car status
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to book
service.
The Car status app is started
from app view in the centre dis-
play and has three tabs:
Messages - saved status messages
Status - check of tyre pressure and engine
oil level
Appointments - booking of service and
repair work.
Related information
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 110)
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 491)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 521)
Book service and repair (p. 510)
Book service and repair
1
Manage service, repair and booking information
directly from your online car.
The information is handled in the
Car status
app, which is opened from the app view in the
centre display.
This service provides, for certain markets, a con-
venient way to book service and workshop visits
directly from your car. Vehicle data is sent to your
dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The
dealer will get back to you with a booking sug-
gestion. For certain markets, the system will
remind you of a scheduled appointment time as it
approaches and the navigation system
2
can also
guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
You also have information on your dealer availa-
ble in the car and can contact your workshop at
any time.
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID
Create a Volvo ID, see section "Volvo ID".
Register the Volvo ID for your car, see sec-
tion "Volvo ID". If a Volvo ID already exists,
use the same e-mail address that was used
when the Volvo ID was created.
1
Applies to certain markets.
2
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
511
Changing contact address
If you would like to change to another e-mail
address, you can contact a Volvo dealer.
Selecting a Volvo dealer
Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact
for service and repairs by going to
www.volvocars.com and navigating to My Volvo.
Prerequisite for booking from car
For the car to send and receive booking informa-
tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see
section "Online car".
Using the service
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message will
appear in the driver display and at the top of the
centre display. The service date is determined by
how much time has passed, hours that the
engine has been running, or distance driven
since the last service.
You can also book a workshop visit later via the
My Volvo owner's portal. To ensure that your
dealer has the latest information on your car you
can send vehicle data, see section "Sending
Vehicle Data" below.
Book service or repair
Fill in the appointment request when desired or
when a message stating that service or repairs
are needed is shown in the driver display and at
the top of the centre display.
Filling in and sending an appointment
request.
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Request appointment button.
4.
Make sure that the correct
Volvo ID is filled
in.
5.
Make sure that the desired
Workshop is
filled in.
6. Fill in information for the workshop in the
field
Tap to write information to the
workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would
like done during the workshop visit or any
other important information to your work-
shop.
Or press the button and speak the informa-
tion. The information is then entered in the
information field in your appointment request.
7.
Press the
Send appointment request but-
ton.
> You will receive an appointment sugges-
tion to your car within a couple of days.
3
.
You will also receive the same communi-
cation via e-mail and when you visit My
Volvo.
In certain markets, once you have sent the
appointment request, the message that
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display.
8.
Press the
Cancel request button to cancel
your request.
3
This time frame may vary depending on market.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
512
The appointment request contains vehicle data
when it is sent from your car to the workshop via
your Internet connection. This information facili-
tates planning for the workshop.
Accept the appointment suggestion
The car will retrieve appointment suggestions via
your Internet connection when it is available.
When the car has received an appointment sug-
gestion, a message will be shown at the top of
the centre display.
1. Tap the message.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
on the
Accept button. Otherwise press
either of the Send new proposal or
Decline buttons.
When an appointment suggestion is accepted,
the reply will be sent to the workshop via your
Internet connection.
Sending vehicle data
You can send vehicle data at any time from your
car, e.g. if you book a workshop visit directly via
the My Volvo owner's portal, and will help your
workshop with better basic information.
The vehicle data sent is the last saved (last time
the car was running).
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Send car data button.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre dis-
play. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
The vehicle data are sent via your Internet
connection.
See workshop information
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Workshop information button.
> A pop-up window with information on your
dealer will open.
4. Call your dealer if you like, or tap on the
address or GPS coordinates to start naviga-
tion to your workshop
2
.
Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service or send data
from your car, the booking information and vehi-
cle data will be sent via you Internet connection.
The vehicle data make it easier for your workshop
to plan your next visit.
The vehicle data consists of information in the
following areas:
service requirement
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN
4
)
the car's software version
the car's diagnostics data.
2
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
4
Vehicle Identification Number.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
513
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 23)
Online car* (p. 467)
Car status (p. 510)
Remote updates
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
searching for and updating system software
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.
Related information
System updates (p. 513)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
System updates
System updates are intended for the Internet-
connected and infotainment components of the
car. If system software updates are available, the
updates can be made all at once or one at a
time.
System updates are handled
via the
Download Centre app
in the centre display's applica-
tion view. A tap on the button
starts a download application in
the home view's bottom sub-
view. If no search for available
updates has been performed since the last time
the infotainment system was started, a search is
performed. No search is performed if a software
installation is in progress. An icon in the down-
load application's button
System updates
shows how many updates are available. A tap on
the button shows a list of updates that can be
installed in the car. For more information and
answers to common questions regarding function
and to download certain system updates, go in to
support.volvocars.com.
For system updates to be possible, the car must
be connected to the Internet, see section "Online
car".
Searching for software updates is activated when
the car is supplied from the factory.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
514
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the igni-
tion is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next time
the car is used.
Update all system software
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then Install all can be
selected at the System updates button instead.
Update individual system software
programs
Select Install for the software required.
Cancelling the download
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced the button
Install at the start of the
download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this can-
not be cancelled.
Background search for software
updates
The function can be deactivated via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Download Centre.
3.
Deselect
Auto Software Update.
If an update is available, the message
New
software updates available is shown in the
centre display's status bar. A tap on the message
starts a download application in the home view's
bottom subview. As soon as the download appli-
cation has started, an icon in the download appli-
cation's button System updates shows how
many updates are available.
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 472)
Remote updates (p. 513)
Data transmission between car and
workshop
5
The time required for a booked visit to a Volvo
workshop can be shortened by transmitting trou-
bleshooting data as soon as the car stops at the
workshop.
The data can be transmitted most conveniently
by selecting the option
Automatically connect
when I arrive in settings view in the centre dis-
play.
Each time the car slows to a slow enough speed
it starts searching for a Wi-Fi network. If an
authorised Volvo network (at a workshop) is
found, a message is displayed or a pop-up win-
dow opens in the centre display. (This does not
apply when you connect manually, see the sec-
tion "Connecting to a workshop manually"
below).
Connecting to a workshop
automatically
NOTE
To avoid the driver being disturbed by unwan-
ted connection inquiries (for example, if the
car is often parked in the neighbourhood of a
workshop with an authorised Volvo network),
the connection mode will change to manual if
the driver declines connection twice within a
period of 5 days.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
515
Without driver confirmation
This option provides the most convenient way of
transmitting troubleshooting data. The car con-
nects without the need for the driver to confirm.
If the car stops at the workshop and is switched
off with the start knob, a message is shown at
the top in the centre display. The car will connect
automatically when the driver’s door is opened
unless the driver presses the
Cancel message
button.
With driver confirmation
This option requires confirmation by the driver for
the car to connect.
If the car stops at the workshop and is switched
off with the start knob, a pop-up window is
opened in the centre display. If the driver taps the
Connect button in the pop-up window then the
car will automatically be connected when the
driver's door is opened. If the driver does nothing,
or presses the Abort button in the pop-up win-
dow, no connection will be made.
Connecting to a workshop manually
Manual connection is made by the service techni-
cian.
Changing the connection mode
The way the car connects can be changed in the
settings view in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
Communication Volvo Service
Networks
.
3.
Select
Automatically connect when I
arrive, Ask before connecting or Never
connect and never ask (manual connec-
tion).
Related information
Online car* (p. 467)
Settings view (p. 169)
5
This functionality will be gradually introduced in connection with the service workshops extending their services.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
516
Raise the car
When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit-
ted, must be switched off before the car is raised.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
517
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must
be positioned under one of the four lifting points.
Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure
the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so
that the car will be stable and not be damaged.
Always use axle stands or similar.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 499)
Jack* (p. 505)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
518
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
the passenger compartment and a handle under
the bonnet.
Open the bonnet
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed posi-
tion.
Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlock-
wise to release the bonnet from the lock
catches and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
When the bonnet is released, the warn-
ing symbol and the graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
For more information on graphics, see section
"Door and seatbelt reminder".
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Close the bonnet
1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
519
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi-
ately and close it.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 519)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 62)
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related com-
ponents.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located
on the driver's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe
6
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high and
hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
work is being performed in the engine com-
partment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)
Filling washer fluid (p. 533)
Topping up coolant (p. 522)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 521)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
6
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
520
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can be
applied.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/
high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
driver display's warning symbol for low oil pres-
sure
is used. Other variants have an oil
level sensor, when the driver is informed via the
driver display's warning symbol and display
texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact
a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
than the one specified.
Related information
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 521)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 569)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 568)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
521
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Filler pipe
7
.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
Action with regard to engine oil level does not
need to be taken until a message is shown in the
driver display.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message
Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
such as
Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Check the oil level
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Status button to show the oil
level.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the engine
is switched off.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km and have
been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine
switched off and on level ground before the
oil level indication is correct.
7
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
522
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, then the message
No value available
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in
the car's systems.
Related information
Engine oil (p. 520)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 568)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 569)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Car status (p. 510)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
partment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and
top up with coolant. The coolant level must
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
523
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the
hatch from the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and
top up with coolant. The coolant level must
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage due to a defective cooling sys-
tem when attempting to start the car.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality tap
water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
Related information
Coolant — specifications (p. 570)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
524
Servicing the climate control system
The air conditioning system must only be serv-
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur-
ing leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Related information
Volvo service programme (p. 510)
Bulb replacement
The bulb in the halogen headlamp, reversing
lamp and rear fog lamp can be replaced by the
driver.
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced without the help of a workshop, but the
plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed
before a bulb can be replaced.
Press down the pins into the plastic cover's
four clips using a screwdriver or similar and
lift away the cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
525
NOTE
Points to remember when the cover is refit-
ted:
The pin in the clip needs to be pressed
back fully before the clip is refitted in the
cover.
When the cover is refitted, the pin must
be pressed in until the end surface is
level with the surface of the clip.
The reversing lamp bulb and the rear fog lamp
bulb can be replaced without assistance from a
workshop.
Contact a workshop
8
if there is a fault in bulbs
other than the bulbs in the halogen headlamps,
the reversing lamp bulb or the rear fog lamp bulb.
If a fault occurs in LED
9
lamps, the entire lamp
unit usually must be replaced.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Lamps, front (car with halogen
headlamps)
Dipped beam
Main beam
Daytime running lights/position lamps
Indicator
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED
9
)
8
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
9
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
526
Lamps, rear
Position lamps (LED)
Position lamps (LED)
Fog lamp
Reversing lamp
Indicator
10
Brake light (LED)
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
Related information
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 526)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 527)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 528)
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 528)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb (p. 529)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 530)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
Ignition positions (p. 385)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
The dipped beam bulb in halogen headlamps
can be replaced by the driver.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
the section "Bulb replacement".
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
dipped beam bulb.
10
Contact a workshop for replacement - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
527
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
and pulling it straight out.
4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide
pin must be aimed straight upwards.
5. Press in the connector.
6. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
Replacing the main beam lamp
The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can
be replaced by the driver.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
the section "Bulb replacement".
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
main beam bulb.
2. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
3. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea-
ses.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Fit the bulb in the socket and screw in.
7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
528
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
The bulb for the daytime running light/position
lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by
the driver.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
the section "Bulb replacement".
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb.
NOTE
The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out.
2. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
6. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in.
7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
Replacing the front direction
indicator bulb
The direction indicator bulb in halogen head-
lamps can be replaced by the driver.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
the section "Bulb replacement".
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
indicator bulb.
2. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
3. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
5. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
529
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
The bulbs for the reversing lamp are located
behind the panel in the tailgate.
1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise and then unhooking the panel.
Place the panel to one side.
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlock-
wise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clock-
wise.
6. Hook on the panel and turn the knobs a
quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
530
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is located behind
a hatch in the tailgate panel.
Left-hand drive cars have the fog lamp on the
left-hand side, right-hand drive cars on the right-
hand side.
The rear fog lamp bulb is replaced as follows:
The tailgate's inner panel.
1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise. Then unhook the panel and
place it to one side.
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb from the bulb holder
by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
5. Wipe the bulb's lens clean of any dirt, grease
or moisture.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn clockwise.
7. Refit the panel and lock it on by turning the
knobs a quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
Bulb specifications (p. 530)
Bulb specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs in the halogen
headlamps as well as the reversing lamp bulb
and the rear fog lamp bulb. Contact a work-
shop
11
if faults occur in other lamps.
Function
W
A
Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PY24W
daytime running lights/
position lamps, front
21/5 W21/5W
Reversing lamp 21 H21W LL
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 524)
11
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
531
Wiper blades in service position
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position when, for example, they are to be
replaced.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
Activating service position
Service mode cannot be activated when the car
is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not
on. Service mode can be activated in two ways via
the centre display:
Via function view
Press the Wiper Service
Position button. The light indi-
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Wiper Service Position.
> The wipers move up to standing straight
up.
Deactivating service position
Service mode can be deactivated in two ways via
the centre display:
Via function view
Press the Wiper Service
Position button in the centre
display. The light indicator in
the button extinguishes when
the service position is deacti-
vated.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Deselect
Wiper Service Position to deacti-
vate service position.
The wiper blades also exit service position if:
Windscreen wiping is activated.
Windscreen washing is activated.
Rain sensor activated.
The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the activation of wiping, wash-
ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv-
ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
Related information
Replacing a wiper blade (p. 532)
Filling washer fluid (p. 533)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
532
Replacing a wiper blade
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing a windscreen wiper blade
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
The wiper blades are different lengths.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
533
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Related information
Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)
Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point.
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir
with a blue cap.
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir the message
Washer fluid
Level low, refill is shown in the driver display
together with the symbol
.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
534
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres.
Related information
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 150)
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 518)
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is used to start up the electri-
cal system and drive the starter motor as well as
other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop
12
.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery,
designed for the carbon dioxide reducing func-
tions, Start/Stop and regenerative charging, and
to support the functionality of the car's different
systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi-
tions, climatic conditions etc.
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points in
the engine compartment. The battery terminals
on the car's starter battery in the cargo area must
not be used.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
12
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
535
Positive charging point
Negative charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotain-
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
the message in the driver display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
536
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
The following table shows specifications for the
starter battery.
Battery
H7 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
800
Size , L×W×H (mm) 315×175×190
Capacity (Ah) 80
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the retaining strap is properly
tightened.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace-
ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
13
type must be fit-
ted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the origi-
nal battery.
Related information
Symbols on the batteries (p. 537)
Support battery (p. 537)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 388)
13
Absorbed Glass Mat.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
537
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support bat-
tery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 534)
Support battery (p. 537)
Support battery
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support bat-
tery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support bat-
tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut
tower.
The following table shows specifications for the
support battery.
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
170
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
538
Size , L×W×H (mm) 150×90×130
Capacity (Ah) 10
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
14
type must be fit-
ted.
NOTE
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is dis-
engaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
The engine starts automatically
15
without the
driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual
gearbox).
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A work-
shop should be contacted in the event of ques-
tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external starter battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function will continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of +15 °C, the
battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour by the car. In a lower outside tempera-
ture, the charging time may increase to
3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge
the battery using an external battery charger.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 534)
Start/Stop (p. 396)
14
Absorbed Glass Mat.
15
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
539
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 388)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 537)
Fuses
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Location of central electrical units
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 540)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
540
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Related information
Fuses (p. 539)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
541
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
542
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Fuses 18-30, 35-37, 46-54 and 55-70 are
of the "Micro" type.
Fuses 31-34, 38-45 and 71-78 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
16
.
Function
A
A
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
USB port in tunnel console,
front*
5
12 V socket in tunnel console,
front
15
Function
A
A
12 V socket in tunnel console,
by legroom for second seat row
15
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
- -
- -
- -
- -
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
Shunt
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
40
Headlamp washers*
25
Windscreen washers 25
- -
Horn 20
Siren*
5
Control module for brake system
(valves, parking brake)
40
Function
A
A
Windscreen wipers 30
Rear window washer 25
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
40
Parking heater*
20
Control unit for brake system
(ABS pump)
40
- -
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
Shunt
Supplied when the ignition is
switched on: Engine control
module; Transmission compo-
nents; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module; Con-
trol module for brake system
5
- -
Right-hand headlamp 7.5
Right-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
7.5
- -
16
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
543
Function
A
A
- -
Module for controlling battery
engagement
5
Airbags 5
Left-hand headlamp 7.5
Left-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
7.5
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
Transmission control module 15
Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
- -
- -
- -
- -
Engine control module; Actuator;
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel);
Position sensor for turbo (die-
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
rol)
20
Function
A
A
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther-
mostat for engine cooling sys-
tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump
(diesel); Glow control module
(diesel)
10
Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve
for output pulse (diesel)
7.5
Control module for spoiler roller
cover; Control module for radia-
tor roller cover; Relay coils for
output pulse (diesel)
5
- -
Lambda-sond, front; Lambda-
sond, rear (petrol)
15
Solenoid for engine oil pump;
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda
sond, rear (diesel)
15
- -
Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark
plugs (petrol)
15
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
Function
A
A
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Starter motor Shunt
Starter motor 40
A
Ampere
B
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 540)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
544
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, the 230 V socket, displays and
door modules.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
545
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
546
Positions
Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are
of the "Micro" type.
Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
17
.
Function
A
A
- -
230 V socket in tunnel console, by
legroom for rear seat*
30
- -
Movement detector*
5
Media player 5
Driver display 5
Keypad in centre console 5
Sun sensor 5
- -
- -
Steering wheel module 5
Function
A
A
Module for start knob and for park-
ing brake control
5
Steering wheel module for heated
steering wheel*
15
- -
- -
- -
- -
Control module for climate control
system
10
Steering lock 7.5
Diagnostic socket OBDII 10
Centre display 5
Fan module for climate control sys-
tem, front
40
- -
Function
A
A
Controls lighting; Interior lighting;
Dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad
in tunnel console, by legroom for
rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con-
trol panels in rear doors
7.5
Control module for driver support
functions
5
Panorama roof with sun blind*
20
Head-up display*
5
Passenger compartment lighting 5
- -
Display in roof console (Seatbelt
reminder/Indicator for airbag on
the front passenger seat)
5
- -
Humidity sensor 5
Door module in right-hand rear
door
20
Fuses in cargo area 10
17
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
547
Function
A
A
Control module for Internet-con-
nected car; Control module for tel-
ematics
5
Door module in left-hand rear door 20
Audio control module (amplifier)
(certain variants)
40
- -
Module for multi-band antenna 5
Modules for seat comfort (mas-
sage) front*
5
- -
Rear window wiper 15
Control module for fuel pump 15
- -
- -
Seat heating, driver's side front 15
Seat heating, passenger side front 15
Coolant pump 10
- -
Function
A
A
Door module in left-hand front door 20
Control module for suspension
(active chassis)*
20
- -
Sensus control module 10
- -
- -
Door module in right-hand front
door
20
- -
TV* (certain markets)
5
Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
A
Ampere
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 540)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 548)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
548
Fuses in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other
things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten-
sioners.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
549
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
550
Positions
Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"
type.
Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
18
.
Function
A
A
Rear window defroster 30
- -
Compressor for air suspension*
40
Lock motor for backrest on rear
right-hand side
15
- -
Lock motor for backrest on rear
left-hand side
15
- -
- -
Power operated tailgate*
25
Electrically operated front passen-
ger seat*
20
Towbar control module*
40
Function
A
A
Seatbelt pretensioner module,
right-hand side
40
Internal relay coils 5
- -
Module for detecting foot move-
ment* (for opening the power oper-
ated tailgate)
5
- -
- -
Towbar control module*
25
Power driver seat*
20
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-
hand side
40
Parking camera*
5
- -
- -
- -
- -
Function
A
A
Control module for airbags and
seatbelt tensioners
5
- -
Seat heating left-hand side rear*
15
- -
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
5
- -
Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol,
certain engine variants)
5
- -
AWD control module*
15
Seat heating right-hand side rear*
15
- -
A
Ampere
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 540)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 544)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 541)
18
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
551
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of
water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce
the risk of water drying stains which may
need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
matic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint
is more delicate when it is new.
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for Automatic
braking when stationary (Auto Hold) and
Automatic application of parking brake. If
these functions are not deactivated, the brake
system will jam when the car is stationary and
the car will not be able to move.
In car washes where the car is towed through
with rolling wheels, the following applies:
1. Drive into the automatic car wash.
2. Deactivate the function for automatic braking
when stationary (Auto Hold) using the switch
in the tunnel console.
3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli-
cation of parking brake via the centre display.
4.
Move the gear lever to position N.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
552
5. Switch off the engine by turning the start
knob in the tunnel console to STOP. Hold
the knob in STOP position for at least
4 seconds.
> The car is ready for the automatic car
wash.
IMPORTANT
The system will automatically switch to P
mode unless the above step is followed. The
wheels are locked in P mode, which they
should not be when putting the car through
an automatic car wash.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
in very damp or cold weather.
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
moisture and corrosion do not attack the
brake linings and reduce braking perform-
ance.
Wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
using such a cleaning agent the instructions
must be followed carefully.
The frames around the side windows, the car's
roof rails and the door frames at the windows*
are produced in anodised aluminium. This means
that they should only be washed using a cleaning
agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
This is in order to avoid discolouration.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
553
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano-
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura-
tion and destroy the surface treatment.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur-
face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi-
nium rims.
Related information
Polishing and waxing (p. 553)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 531)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 413)
Using the parking brake (p. 410)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 390)
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
does not need to be polished until it is at least
one year old. However, the car can be waxed
during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and
tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More
stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub-
bing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid
or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack-
aging carefully. Many preparations contain both
polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint-
work damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)
Paint damage (p. 556)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
554
Rustproofing
The car has effective protection against corro-
sion.
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of
modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet
metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-
protected and minimised metal overlap, and
shielding plastic components, abrasion protection
and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas.
This combination guarantees that the body will
remain free from corrosion problems over time. In
the chassis, exposed components of the wheel
suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast
aluminium.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur-
ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the
car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com-
ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)
Paint damage (p. 556)
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
the upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical but-
tons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain
removers since this risks destroying the colour of
the upholstery.
Leather upholstery*
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the
cleaning and application of the protective cream
once to four times per year (or more if required).
The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available
from Volvo dealers.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended
for cleaning the leather steering wheel.
Leather panel*
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather on the top of the instrument panel or at
the door panel. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is
recommended for cleaning the leather panels.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
555
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois-
tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur-
faces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
dealers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by Volvo dealers.
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 555)
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and readability.
Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
cloth.
Home button for the centre display.
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press
on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. The screen should be
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
556
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
play.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 554)
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Paint damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof-
ing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Colour code
The colour code label is located on the car's door
pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Materials that may be needed
Primer
19
- a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
20
.
Masking tape.
fine sand paper
19
.
Related information
Repairing paint damage (p. 557)
Type designations (p. 560)
Rustproofing (p. 554)
19
If required.
20
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
557
Repairing paint damage
When repairing paint damage, the car must be
clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray
into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
2. Before painting, if necessary, e.g if sharp
edges are found around the damage, a light
sanding with a very fine sand paper can be
done locally. The surface is cleaned thor-
oughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
For scratches, proceed as described above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
Paint damage (p. 556)
Cleaning the exterior (p. 551)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
560
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number,
etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be
read on labels in the car.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
561
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica-
tion number, permissible maximum weights and
code designation for exterior colour and type
approval number. The decal is positioned on the
door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
number.
Label for engine oil.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
562
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Related information
Air conditioning — specifications (p. 571)
SPECIFICATIONS
563
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2941
B Length 4939
C Load length, floor, folded
seat
1988
D Load length, floor 1153
E Height 1543
F Load height 704
Dimensions mm
G Front track
1652
A
1655
B
H Rear track
1643
A
1645
B
I Load width, floor 1130
J Width
1903 (1879
C
)
Dimensions mm
K Width including door mir-
rors
2052
L Width including folded-in
door mirrors
1929
A
Applies to 18/19-inch wheels.
B
Applies to 20/21-inch wheels.
C
Body width.
SPECIFICATIONS
564
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb
weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 565)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
565
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T5 AWD B4204T20 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
T6 AWD B4204T27 Automatic
1800
B
2500
C
130
D4 AWD D4204T14 Manual select
1800
B
2200
C
130
||
SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory.
566
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic
1800
B
2500
C
130
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
B
Applies to cars that are not equipped for a higher towing weight.
C
Applies to cars that are equipped for a higher towing weight.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of 100
kg, provided that speed is limited to 100
km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements
for the vehicle combination, such as speed,
etc. must be observed.
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Weights (p. 564)
Driving with a trailer (p. 429)
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 432)
SPECIFICATIONS
567
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 350/1500-4500 4
T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 350/1500–4800 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4
D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4
D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 480/1750-2250 4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 568)
Coolant — specifications (p. 570)
SPECIFICATIONS
568
Engine oil — specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine code
A
Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 AWD B4204T20 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.9
T5 AWD B4204T23 approx. 5.9
T6 AWD B4204T27 approx. 5.9
D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2
D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 569)
Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 521)
Engine oil (p. 520)
SPECIFICATIONS
569
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long jour-
neys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter
than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Engine oil — specifications (p. 568)
Engine oil (p. 520)
SPECIFICATIONS
570
Coolant — specifications
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water
1
, see the packag-
ing.
Transmission fluid — specifications
The prescribed transmission fluid for each
respective gearbox alternative can be read in the
table.
Manual gearbox
Prescribed transmission
fluid:
BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid:
AW1
NOTE
The transmission fluid does not need to be
changed under normal driving conditions.
Brake fluid — specifications
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres-
sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
571
Fuel tank - volume
Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Volume (litres)
Petrol engine approx. 60
Diesel engine approx. 60
Related information
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 420)
Air conditioning — specifications
The car's climate control system uses a refriger-
ant, either R1234yf or R134a depending on
market. Information about which refrigerant the
car's climate control system uses is printed on a
decal located on the inside of the bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
||
SPECIFICATIONS
572
Refrigerant
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf
Weight Prescribed grade
650 g R1234yf
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
60 ml PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Related information
Servicing the climate control system (p. 524)
Type designations (p. 560)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
573
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
CO2 per km.
Explanation
gram CO
2
/km
litre/100 km
urban driving
extra-urban driving
combined driving
manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is miss-
ing then it is included in the enclosed supple-
ment.
T5 AWD (B4204T23) 214 9.4 143 6.3 169 7.4
T6 AWD (B4204T27)
227 9.9 147 6.5 176 7.7
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
159 6.1 120 4.6 134 5.1
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
162 6.2 124 4.7 138 5.2
D5 AWD (D4204T23)
159 6.1 128 4.9 139 5.3
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU driving
cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb
weight in the basic version and without extra
equipment. The car's weight may increase
depending on equipment. This, as well as how
||
SPECIFICATIONS
574
heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consump-
tion and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel con-
sumption compared with the table's values.
Examples of this are:
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects the car's weight.
The driver's driving style.
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those fitted as standard on the model's basic
version then rolling resistance may increase.
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the above-mentioned examples
can result in significantly increased consumption.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in
a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see
below) which are used in the certification of the
car and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
EU driving cycles
Official fuel consumption figures are based on
two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory
environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accord-
ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and
715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE
Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are
also used for quality control, there are significant
requirements for repeatability of the tests. For
this reason the tests are carried out under close
scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions
(e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As
a consequence of this the results from the official
figures are not obviously representative of what
the customer sees during actual usage.
The regulations cover the driving cycles for
"Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":
Urban driving - the measurement starts with
cold starting the engine. The driving is simu-
lated.
Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated
and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
The official value for combined driving, which is
reported in the table, is a combination of the
results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban
driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal
requirements.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to
extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO
2
emissions) during the two driving cycles. These
are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Weights (p. 564)
Economical driving (p. 425)
SPECIFICATIONS
575
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or other
documents. The following table shows all
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
= Approved
Engine man/
aut
235/55R18
7,5x18x50,5
235/50R19
7,5x19x50,5
245/45R20
8x20x49.5
245/40R21
8x21x49.5
T5 AWD (B4204T20) aut
T5 AWD (B4204T23) aut
T6 AWD (B4204T27) aut
D4 AWD (D4204T14) man
D4 AWD (D4204T14) aut
D5 AWD (D4204T23) aut
Related information
Load index and speed rating (p. 576)
Type designations (p. 560)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)
SPECIFICATIONS
576
Load index and speed rating
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine man/
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)
A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)
B
T5 AWD B4204T20 aut 96 V
T5 AWD B4204T23 aut 96 V
T6 AWD B4204T27 aut 96 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 man 96 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 96 V
D5 AWD D4204T23 aut 96 V
A
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 577)
Type designations (p. 560)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 506)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 506)
SPECIFICATIONS
577
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna-
tive can be found in the table.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
All engines
235/55 R18
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
245/40 R21
0 - 160
C
240 240 260 260 260
160+
D
250 250 280 280 -
Temporary Spare Tyre
max. 80
E
420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C
0 - 100 mph
D
100+ mph
E
max 50 mph
Related information
Type designations (p. 560)
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 488)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 575)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
579
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 406
A
A/C (Air conditioning) 190
ABS
anti-lock brakes 406
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 290, 299
Accessories and extra equipment 23
Active bending lights 141
Active main beam 138
Active Park Assist 374
function 374
Limitations 379
operation 376
Symbols and messages 381
Active Yaw Control 273
Adaptation of headlamp beam 141
Adapting driving characteristics 272, 400
Adaptive Cruise Control 290, 299
change cruise control functionality 301
fault tracing 300
function 290
managing speed 294, 295
overtaking 298
radar sensor 318
setting the time interval 296
standby mode 297
temporary deactivation 297
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 215
Adjusting the steering wheel 132
Aerial
location 240
Airbag 63
Activating/deactivating 66
driver's side 64
passenger side 64, 66
Airbag, see Airbag 63
Air conditioning 190
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 571
Air conditioning system 182, 186
repair 524
Air distribution 197
Air vents 197, 199
change 198
defrosting 194
Recirculation 196
table of options 201
Air quality 184, 185
allergies and asthma 185
passenger compartment filter 185
Air recirculation 196
Alarm 262
automatic re-arming 264
deactivation 264
reduced alarm level 262
Alcohol lock 384
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 185
All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 406
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 406
Android Auto 457
Apple CarPlay 454, 455
Applications
settings 178
Approach lighting 148
Apps 438
download, update and uninstall 472
Ashtray 224
Audio and media 438
Audio settings 439, 467
media 452
phone 466
play media 447
Text message 465
Auto climate control 189
Automatic brake 413
after collision 409
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
580
Automatic car washes 551
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 396
Automatic gearbox 390
trailer 431
Automatic relocking 242
Automatic speed limiter 281
AUX
jack for connecting media 452
Auxiliary heater 215
AWD, All Wheel Drive 406
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 121, 122, 124
rear seat, lowering 130
Bag holder 228
Battery 388, 534
jump starting 388
maintenance 534
overload 418
start 534
support 537
symbols on the battery 537
warning symbols 537
BLIS 340, 342, 343
Bluetooth
connect 451
connect car to Internet 468
phone 460
settings 467
Bonnet, opening 518
Book service and repair 510
Brake assist
after collision 409
Brake fluid
grade 570
Brake functions 406
Brake light 143
Brakes 406
Anti-lock braking system, ABS 406
automatic when stationary 413
brake assist system, BAS 408
brake light 143
brake system 406
emergency brake lights 408
handbrake 409, 410, 412
bulbs, specifications 530
C
Camera sensor 337
Car care 551
Leather upholstery 554
Car functions
in centre display 47
Cargo area 226
electrical socket 220
lighting 146
mounting points 228
protective net 232
Cargo cover 230
Cargo grille 233
Car holiday 418
Car key battery low 257
Car modem
connect car to Internet 468
settings 472
Car status 510
Tyre pressure 491
Car upholstery 554
Car washing 551
Catalytic converter
Recovery 435
CD player 450
central locking 245
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
581
Centre display
change settings 45
cleaning 555
climate control 187
messages 106
operation 36, 40
overview 33
symbols in status bar 45
Checking the engine oil level 521
Child safety 71
Child safety locks 261
Child seat 71
integrated booster cushion 82
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 77
lower mounting points 74
positioning/fitting 71
table for location 75
table of i-Size 81
table of ISOFIX 78
Upper mounting points 73
Cigarette lighter 224
City Safety 330, 332, 333, 335, 336,
337, 339
Cleaning
automatic car wash 551
car washing 551
centre display 555
Fabric upholstery 554
rims 553
seatbelts 555
upholstery 554
Clean Zone Interior Package 185
Climate control 182, 186
auto-regulation 189
centre display 187
experienced temperature 183
fan control 193
Parking 206
rear seat 188
sensors 183
temperature control 190
voice control 119
zones 182
Clock, adjustment 99
CO
2
emissions 573
Collision 56, 59, 63, 69
Collision warning 330
Collision warning system
Pedestrian detection 333
Radar sensor 318
Colour code, paint 556
Combined instrument panel 90
settings 94
Compass 156
calibration 157
Condensation in headlamps 551
Controls lighting 135
Coolant 570
Coolant, filling 522
Cooling system
overheating 417
Cornering lights 142
Corner Traction Control 273
Cover
cargo area 230
Crash, see Collision 56
Cruise control 284
deactivate 287
managing speed 284, 285
temporary deactivation 286
CTA 343, 344, 345
Cyclist detection 333
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 185
D
DAB Radio 444
Data
recording 22
transfer between car and workshop 514
Data link connector 23
Daytime running lights 137
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
582
Deadlock 246
deactivation 246
Defrosting 194
Diesel 423
run out of fuel 424
Diesel particle filter 424
Digital radio (DAB) 444
Dimensions 563
Towing bracket 428
dipped beam 137
Dipstick, electronic 521
Direction indicator 144
Direction indicators 144
direction of rotation 487
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 394
Display lighting 135
Distance Warning 288, 289
Limitations 290
Door mirrors 153
automatic dimming 154
resetting 154
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy 25
Driver Alert Control 352
operation 353
Driver display
application menu 105
messages 106
Driver performance 168
Driver profile 174, 175, 176, 177
edit 175
import/export from/to USB 177
select 174
Drivetrain
Gearbox 389
Driving
cooling system 417
with a tailer 429
Driving economy 425
Driving in water 416
Driving mode 400
Driving with a trailer
towball load 565
towing capacity 565
E
ECO mode 403
Economical driving 403, 425
ECO pressure 488, 577
Electrical socket 220
Electrical system 534
Electric parking brake 409
low battery voltage 412
Emergency equipment
first aid kit 505
warning triangle 504
Emergency puncture repair 494, 498
action 495
inflating the tyres 498
rechecking 495
Emergency puncture repair kit 495
location 494
overview 495
sealing fluid 494
Emissions of carbon dioxide 573
Engine
deactivate 387
overheating 417
start 386
Start/Stop 396
Engine braking, automatic 415
Engine compartment
coolant 522
Engine oil 520
overview 519
Engine drag control 273
Engine oil 520, 569
adverse driving conditions 569
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
583
filter 520
grade and volume 568
Engine oil, filling 521
Engine specifications 567
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 302
see Messages and symbols 302, 316
Error messages in BLIS 347
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume 422
External dimensions 563
F
Fan
Air distribution 198
Air vents 199
Control 193
Fault tracing for the camera sensor 327
Ferry transport 405
First aid 505
First aid kit 505
Flooded road 416
Fluids, capacities 533, 570, 571
Fluids and oils 570, 571
Fog lamp
front 142
rear 142
Foot brake 406, 408
Four-C 405
Front seat
Climate control 187
Fan 193
heating 203
Temperature 190
Ventilation 204
Front seat, manual 121
Front seat, power 121, 123
adjusting seat 122, 127
massage 124
memory function 122
multi-function control 123, 124
FSC, ecolabelling 32
Fuel 421, 422, 423
fuel consumption 573
identifier 422, 423
Fuelling
filling 420
Fuel tank
volume 571
Fuel vapour 421
Fuse box 539
Fuses
changing 540
General 539
in cargo area 548
in engine compartment 541
under glovebox 544
G
Gearbox 389
automatic 390
manual 392
Gear positions
automatic gearbox 390
Gear selector inhibitor 394
Gear shift indicator 392
Glass
laminated/reinforced 32
Glovebox 225
Gracenote
®
449
Gross vehicle weight 564
GSI - Gear selector assistance 392
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
584
H
Handbrake 409, 410
Hazard warning flashers 143
HDC 415
Headlamp beam
adaptation 141
height adjustment 135
Headlamp control 134
Headlamp levelling of headlamps 135
Headlamp pattern, adjusting 141
Headlamp pattern adjustment 141
head restraint 128
Heated washer nozzles 150
Heater 213
auxiliary heater 215
parking heater 214
Heating
seats 203
steering wheel 205
Windows 194
High engine temperature 417
Hill descent control 415
Hill Descent Control 415
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 412
Hill Start Assist 412
HomeLink
®
162
Home safe light duration 148
Horn 131
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 185
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 69
Ignition position 385
Immobiliser 260
Indicator symbols 95
Individual drive mode 400
Inflatable curtain 69
Inflatable Curtain 69
Information display 90, 94
Infotainment system (Audio and media) 438
Instrument lighting 135
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car 86
right-hand drive car 87
Instruments and controls 86, 87
Integrated booster cushion 82
lowering 84
raising 82
IntelliSafe
Driver support 28
Interior Air Quality System 185
Interior lighting 145
Interior rearview mirror 155
automatic dimming 155
Intermittent wiping 148
Internet, see Internet-connected car 467
Internet-connected car
book service and repair 510
system updates 513
iPod
®
, connection 451
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System 489, 491, 492, 493
J
Jack 505
Journey statistics 168
Jump starting 388
K
Kerb weight 564
Key 176, 236, 239, 243
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
585
Keyboard 49, 53
Keypad in the steering wheel 131
Key tag 236
L
Labels 560
Laminated glass 32
Lamps 524
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 354, 356, 358
Lane keeping assistant
operation 356
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 554
Level control 405
License agreement 474
Lifting tool 505
Lighting
active bending lights 141
approach lighting 148
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment 145
Automatic main beam 138
bulbs, specifications 530
controls 134, 145
controls lighting 135
cornering lights 142
daytime running lights 137
dipped beam 137
display lighting 135
fog lamp 142
headlamp levelling 135
home safe lighting 148
instrument lighting 135
in the passenger compartment 145
main beam 138
position lamps 136
rear fog lamp 142
Lighting, bulb replacement 524
daytime running lights/position lamps
front 528
dipped beam 526
direction indicators front 528
main beam 527
rear fog lamp 530
Reversing lamp 529
LKA - Lane Keeping Aid 354, 356, 358
Loading
cargo area 227
General 227
load retaining eyelets 228
long load 227
Loading hooks 228
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area 228
Lock
locking 241, 245
unlocking 241, 245
Lockable wheel bolts 502
Lock confirmation 243
Locking/unlocking
tailgate 247, 249
Low battery voltage
Battery 418
Low speed control 414
M
Main beam 138
Maintained climate comfort 206
start/shut-off 210
maintenance
Rustproofing 554
Manual gearbox 392
Max. roof load 564
Media player 446
compatible file formats 459
voice control 118
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 302
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 339
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
586
Messages in BLIS 347
Messages in displays 106
manage 108
saved 110
Metric, Imperial, US 98
Mileage 165
Misting
condensation in headlamps 551
Mobile phone, see Phone 461
Mood lighting 146
N
Net
cargo area 232
O
octane rating 422
Oil, see also Engine oil 568, 569
Oil level low 521
Online car 467
book service and repair 510
connect car 468
no or poor connection 470
system updates 513
Options/accessories 19
Output 567
outside temperature gauge 98
Overheating 417, 431
Owner's manual 19
ecolabelling 32
in centre display 15, 16
Owner information 14
Owner’s Manual in mobile 18
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 66
Paddle on the steering wheel 131
Paintwork
colour code 556
damage and touch-up 556, 557
Panorama roof
opening and closing 159
pinch protection 161
sun blind 158
ventilation position 160
PAP - Active Park Assist 374
Park Assist 363, 365, 367
function 363, 365
Park assist camera 368, 370, 373
settings 372
Parking brake 409, 410, 412
Parking climate 206
Symbols and messages 212
Parking heater 214
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 66
Passenger compartment filter 185
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater) 214
Passenger compartment interior 218
ashtray 224
cigarette lighter 224
electrical socket 220
Sun visor 226
tunnel console 219
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic 145
Pedestrian Protection System 58
Petrol grade 422
Phone 460
Calls 463, 466
connect 461
text message 465
voice control 118
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
587
Pilot Assist 304, 307, 309, 310, 311,
313, 314, 316
overtaking 298
Pinch protection, panorama roof 161
PIN code 472
Pocket park assist - PAP 374
Polishing 553
Position lamp 136
Power operated tailgate 253, 256
Power panorama roof 158
Power save mode 418
Power seat 121, 123
Power windows 151
resetting 153
PPS (Pedestrian Protection System) 58
Preconditioning 206
start/shut-off 207
Timer 208
Protective grille 233
Pump up tyre 498
Puncture 494
Q
Queue Assist 304, 309, 316
Queue assistance 304, 309, 316
R
Radar sensor 290
Limitations 319
Radio 440
change and search for radio station 440
DAB 444
settings 445
voice control 118
Rain sensor 149
Raising the car 516
Rear door
sun blind 153
Rear seat 128
Climate control 187, 188
Fan 193
head restraint 128
heating 203
lowering the backrest 130
Temperature 190
Rearview and door mirrors
compass 156, 157
door 153
electrically retractable 155
heating 194
interior 155
rear window
heating 194
Washers 151
Wiper 151
Recommendations during driving 418
Recovery 435
Red Key 239
Refrigerant 524
Refuelling 420
Regeneration 424
Remote control, HomeLink
®
programmable 162
Remote control immobiliser 260
Remote control key 176, 236, 239, 243
battery replacement 257
connect to driver profile 176
detachable key blade 250
loss 236
range 238
Remote control key system, type approval 265
Remote updates 513
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
588
Resetting, trip meter 166
Resetting the door mirrors 154
Resetting the power windows 153
Restore settings 179
Retractable power door mirrors 155
Retractable towing bracket 426
Road run-off protection 360, 362
Road sign information 348
Limitations 352
operation 348, 350, 351
Roll Stability Control 272
Roof load, max. weight 564
RSC (Roll Stability Control) 272
Run out of fuel
diesel 424
Rustproofing 554
S
Safety 56
pregnancy 56
Safety mode 69
start/movement 70
Sealing fluid 494
Seat, see Seats 121
Seatbelt 59
buckle/unbuckle 60
pregnancy 56
seatbelt reminder 62
seatbelt tensioner 59
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 59
Seatbelt reminder 62
Seatbelt tensioner 59
Seats
heating 203
manual front seat 121
memory function front seat 122
power front seat 121, 123
rear seat 128
Ventilation 204
whiplash protection 57
sensors
Air quality 185
Climate control 183
Sensus
connection and entertainment 29
Service position 531
Service programme 510
Set time interval 289
Settings 169
Categories 170
Resetting 173
settings view 169
system settings 172
Side airbag 68
Side Impact Protection System 68, 69
SIM card 472
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 68, 69
Skidding 419
Ski hatch 229
slippery driving conditions 419
Soot filter 424
spare wheel 502
Speed camera 350
Speed limiter 277, 281
deactivation 280
getting started 278
temporary deactivation 279
Speed ratings, tyres 506
Spin control 273
Stabiliser
trailer 432
Stability and traction control system 273, 275
operation 274
Stability system 273
Stains 554
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
589
Start/Stop 396, 398
function and operation 396
the engine does not stop 398
Starting the engine 386
Start the car 386
Steering force, speed related 272
Steering force level, see Steering force 272
Steering lock 388
Steering wheel 131, 132
heating 205
keypad 131
paddle 131
steering wheel adjustment 132
Steering wheel paddles 395
Stone chips and scratches 556, 557
Stop/start function 396
Storage spaces 218
glovebox 225
tunnel console 219
Sun blind
panorama roof 158
Rear door 153
Sun visor 226
Support 19
Support battery 537
Switching off the engine 387
Switch off engine 387
Symbols
indicator symbols 95
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 302
centre display status field 45
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 339
parking climate 212
System
updates 513
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking 247, 249
power 253, 256
Temperature
Control 190
experienced 183
Temporary spare
spare wheel 502
Through-load hatch 229
Tools 433, 504
Towbar
foldable 426
Towing 434, 435
Towing bracket 426
specifications 428
Towing capacity and towball load 565
Towing eye 433
Traction control 273
Traffic information 445
Trailer 432
cable 429
driving with a trailer 429, 431
snaking 432
Trailer stability assist 273, 432
Transmission 389
Transmission oil
grade 570
Tread 488
Tread depth 488, 503
Tread wear indicators 488
Trip computer 165, 166, 168
Trip meter 165
Trip meter, resetting 166
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 300
TSA - trailer stability assist 273, 432
Tunnel console 219
Tunnel detection 137
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
590
TV 453
Type approval
radar system 323
remote control key system 265
Type designations 560
Tyre dimension 499, 506
Tyre load index 506
Tyre monitoring 489
Tyre pressure label 488
Tyre pressure monitoring
Calibrate 493
low tyre pressure 492
Tyres 486
dimensions 575
direction of rotation 487
installation 501
pressure 488, 577
puncture repair 494
removal 499
specifications 575, 576, 577
storage 486
tread depth 503
tread wear indicators 488
tyre pressure monitoring 489
winter tyres 503
U
Unit standard
Trip computer 166
Unlocking
from the outside 241
with key blade 251
USB
connect car to Internet 468
jack for connecting media 452
V
Vanity mirror
lighting 146
Ventilation 197, 198, 199
seats 204
Vibration damper 426
Video 451, 452
settings 447
Voice control
Climate control 119
map navigation 120
phone 118
radio and media 118
settings 117
Voice recognition 115
VOL marking 486
Volvo ID 23
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control 290
stability and traction control system 273
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS 97
alternator not charging 97
Fault in brake system 97
Low oil pressure 97
Parking brake applied 97
seatbelt reminder 97
starter battery not charging 97
Warning 97
Warning sound
Parking brake 412
Warning symbols 97
Safety 56
Warning triangle 504
Washer fluid 533
Washer nozzles, heated 150
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
591
Washers
rear window 151
washer fluid, filling 533
windscreen 150
Waxing 553
Weights
kerb weight 564
Wheel bolts 502
lockable 502
Wheel change 499
Wheel rim, dimensions 506
Wheel rims
cleaning 553
Wheels
installation 501
removal 499
snow chains 503
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 575
tyre load index and speed rating 506, 576
whiplash protection 57
Whiplash Protection System 57
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 57
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet 468
delete network 471
share internet connection, hotspot 469
technology and security 471
Window
sun blind 153
Windows and glass 32
Windscreen
heating 194
projected image 112
Windscreen washing 150
Windscreen wiper 148
rain sensor 149
Winter driving 419
Winter tyres 503
Winter wheels 503
Wiper blades
changing 532
Service position 531
Wipers and washing 148
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
592
TP 22394 (English), AT 1646, MY17, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2016, Copyright © 2000-2016 Volvo Car Corporation
8

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 17,89 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 612 pagina's

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2017 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 630 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info